JP2016059407A - Pachinko game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a Pachinko game machine improved to prevent mannerism of a reserved read-ahead performance.SOLUTION: A Pachinko game machine is configured such that in prior determination processing to be performed when a hold occurs, game contents that can change according to a remaining retention number at a point of time when the occurred hold is consumed and game contents that cannot change according to a remaining retention number at a point of time when the occurred hold is consumed can be determined in advance, and a reserved read-ahead performance can be executed with a high probability when the latter prior determination is performed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 15

Description

  It relates to pachinko machines.

  The most popular pachinko machines are now called “special symbols” (or main game symbols) on the 7-segment display, etc., when a game ball enters the starter (start chucker). When the special symbol is variably displayed and the special symbol is in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the special gaming state in which the player is in a profit state higher than the normal gaming state {the special winning opening that is normally closed This is a type of machine (so-called “first-class pachinko game machine”) that shifts to (a game of contents that a so-called attacker opens under a predetermined condition). Here, in order to reduce the burden of display control of special symbols that are directly linked to the interests of the player, in addition to the aforementioned “special symbols”, it is referred to as “decorative symbols” for the purpose of enhancing the fun of the game. The symbol to be displayed is variably displayed on a display such as a liquid crystal having a size larger than that of the display unit in a form synchronized with the variation of the special symbol. And when the change of the special symbol is started, the decorative symbol also starts to change accordingly, and when the special symbol stops in a specific mode (for example, “7”), the decorative symbol also changes to the predetermined mode (for example, “777”). Then, the player recognizes that the transition to the special game has been confirmed because the decorative symbol has stopped in a predetermined manner.

  Here, since this mechanism is common to this type of pachinko machine, in order to differentiate it from other types, how to devise the overall production including the variation aspect of the above-mentioned design and to have high interest It is focused on whether to grant. For example, if you are in a situation where you can't start changing the display of a “special symbol”, the game will have a function to hold the change display when a game ball has entered the start gate. One of them is a technique (so-called reservation pre-reading effect) that improves the interest of the game by configuring so as to notify or suggest.

JP 2010-158382 A JP2010-110479A JP2011-156039A JP2011-156041

  However, since the pre-reading effect has been frequently used, there is a problem that further improvement is necessary for the control method in order to improve the interest.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect is
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the identification information;
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the suspension occurs. Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30);
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the determination result A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the winning / failing determination result based on the random number is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game to be obtained,
Non-winning identification information stop display mode A, non-winning identification information stop display mode B, and non-winning identification information as types related to the stop display mode of identification information when the determination result based on the random number is non-winning At least a stop display mode C,
Identification when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, compared to the variation display period of the identification information when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The variable information display period is configured to be relatively long,
If the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A when the identification information variable display start condition for a certain hold is satisfied, the first identification information variable display start condition for the certain hold While the average value for the variable information display period of the identification information may differ depending on the number of holds remaining at the time of satisfying
When the variable information display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, if the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the certain hold Regardless of the number of suspensions remaining at the time when the identification information fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, the average value related to the identification information fluctuation display period is configured to be uniform,
Prior to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold after the occurrence of the certain hold, the pre-reading information indicating the presence of the certain hold to the player is suggested to the player in advance or Can be informed,
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold, the display of the identification information scheduled to be stopped when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied A mode is preliminarily determined, and when the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the reservation pre-read information is suggested to the player in advance. Alternatively, on the other hand, if the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the reservation prefetch information is not suggested or notified to the player in advance, or the advance Compared with the case where the determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the frequency with which the reserved pre-read information is suggested or notified to the player in advance In the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B and the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to differ in frequency of suggesting or informing the player of the hold prefetch information in advance.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect, there is an effect that it is possible to improve the control method related to the hold prefetching effect.

FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is an overall electrical configuration diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a functional block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 5 is a main flowchart on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory driving determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8 is a flowchart of the main game content determination random number acquisition process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 13 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 14 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 15 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 16 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 17 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 19 is a flowchart of special game operation condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 23 is a main flowchart on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 26 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 27 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 30 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 31 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 32 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 34 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 35 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 36 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 37 is a table configuration diagram used in the first (second) main game symbol display process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 38 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 39 is a flowchart of special game operating condition determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 42 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 43 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 44 is a flowchart of a pre-reading execution content determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 45 is a flowchart of stay stage determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 46 is an operation diagram in the pachinko gaming machine according to the second embodiment. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the second embodiment. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of special game-related display control processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination process on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 2 from the second embodiment. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 51 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 3 from the second embodiment. FIG. 54 is a flowchart of special game control processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the second embodiment. FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the second embodiment. FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination processing after the special game is completed on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the second embodiment. FIG. 57 is a flowchart of first (second) main game symbol display processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the variable addition time control process on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 59 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 60 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 61 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing during additional time on the sub-main control unit side in the pachinko gaming machine according to the third embodiment. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing on the main control board side in the pachinko gaming machine according to Modification 1 from the third embodiment.

Form to carry out

  First, the meaning of each term in this specification will be described. “Pitching” includes not only winning a prize ball to be paid out, but also passing to a “through chucker” without winning a prize ball. “Open state, open state” and “closed state, closed state” are, for example, in the configuration of a general big prize opening (so-called attacker), open state = easy-to-win state and closed state = non-winning state Easy state. Also, for example, a state protruding from the game board (player side) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as advance state) and a state of being retracted into the game board (side opposite to the player side) (hereinafter referred to as retreat state) In a configuration (so-called velo-type attacker) that can take the following condition, the advance state = easy-to-win state and the evacuation state = non-easy-to-win state. “Random number” is a random number used in a lottery (lottery by an electronic computer) to determine some game content in a pachinko game machine, and includes a pseudo-random number in addition to a random number in a narrow sense (for example, a hard- Random numbers and soft random numbers as pseudo-random numbers). For example, the so-called “basic random numbers” that affect the outcome of the game, specifically, “winning random numbers (random numbers for success / failure lottery)” related to the transition of special games, and the variation mode (or variation time) of the identification symbol "Variation mode determination random number" for determining, "symbol determination random number" for determining a stop symbol, "hit symbol determination random number" for determining whether or not to shift to a specific game (for example, probability variation game) after a special game, etc. be able to. It is not necessary to use all these random numbers when determining the contents of the variation mode, the contents of the definite identification information, etc., and it is sufficient to use at least one random number that is the same or different from each other. Also, in this specification, the number of random numbers may be displayed in the form of the number of random numbers or a plurality of random numbers, but one entry (for example, starting entrance) that triggers the acquisition of random numbers. The random number obtained by entering the ball is referred to as one (ie, in the above example, the random number bundle of winning random number + variation mode determining random number + design determining random number... Is referred to as one random number) . Further, for example, a kind of random number (for example, a winning random number) may also serve as another kind of random number (for example, a symbol determination random number). “Game state” means, for example, a transition to a special game state rather than a non-stochastic game state in which a lottery probability for transition to a special game state or a special game state in which a special winning opening can be in an open state is a predetermined value. A probabilistic variable gaming state with a high lottery probability, an auxiliary gaming state with assistance for winning at the starting port that becomes a lottery opportunity for special games (so-called normal symbol short-time state, for example, a variable member is attached to the starting port In such a case, the variable member may be one or a combination of a plurality of combinations such as a long opening period of the variable member, a high probability of winning the opening of the variable member, and a short notification time of the result of the variable member opening lottery. “The average value is uniform regardless of the number of holds” means that the variable time is selected without depending on the number of holds, but other provisions include (1) Loss In the stop symbol “HA”, the first difference is generated between the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “a” and the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “b” that is larger than the number of holdings “a”. In the pattern “HB”, there is no difference between the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “a” and the average value of the fluctuation time at the number of holdings “b”, or a second difference is generated rather than the first difference, and the second (2) is assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected at the time of the stop symbol “HA” related to the loss at the number of holdings c (for example, 4 holdings). Random number range assigned to the most easily selected variation mode The occupation ratio α is assumed to be the occupation ratio α, and it is most easily selected in the random number range assigned to all the variation modes that can be selected at the time of the stop symbol “HB” related to the loss with the retention number c (for example, the retention number 4). When the proportion of the random number range assigned to the variation mode is the occupation rate β, the occupation rate α is higher than the occupation rate β (that is, the variation mode that is most easily selected is concentrated and selected. Easy) value.

  The following embodiment is a model in which two conventional type 1 pachinko gaming machines are mixed (type 1 type 1 complex machine). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is applicable to other game machines (for example, conventional 1st type, 2nd type, 3rd type, general pachinko game machines such as general electric roles). . Note that this embodiment is merely an example, the location and function of each means, the order of each step regarding various processes, the timing of flag on / off, the name of the means responsible for each step, etc. It is not limited to the following aspects. In addition, the above-described embodiments and modified examples should not be understood as being limited to being applied to specific items, and may be in any combination. For example, it should be understood that a modification example of an embodiment is a modification example of another embodiment, and even if one modification example and another modification example are described independently, there is the modification example. It should be understood that a combination of the modified example and another modified example is also described. In the present embodiment, there are a lottery table and a reference table for various tables, but these are not limited, and the lottery table may be a reference table or vice versa.

  Here, before describing each component, the characteristics (outline) of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

  First, the basic structure of the front side of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Pachinko gaming machines mainly consist of a gaming machine frame and a gaming board. Hereinafter, these will be described in order.

  First, the gaming machine frame of the pachinko gaming machine includes an outer frame D12, a front frame D14, a transparent plate D16, a door D18, an upper ball dish D20, a lower ball dish D22, and a launch handle D44. First, the outer frame D12 is a frame for fixing the pachinko gaming machine to a position where it should be installed. The front frame D14 is a frame body aligned with the opening portion of the outer frame D12, and is attached to the outer frame D12 via a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The front frame D14 includes a mechanism for launching a game ball, a mechanism for detachably storing a game board, a mechanism for guiding or collecting the game ball, and the like. The transparent plate D16 is made of glass or the like and supported by the door D18. The door D18 is attached to the front frame D14 through a hinge mechanism (not shown) so as to be opened and closed. The upper ball tray D20 has a mechanism for storing game balls, sending the game balls to the launch rail, and extracting the game balls to the lower ball tray D22. The lower ball tray D22 has a mechanism for storing and extracting game balls. Speakers D24 are provided on the upper left and right sides of the gaming machine, and sound effects corresponding to the gaming state and the like are output.

  Next, the game board has a game area D30 defined by an outer rail D32 and an inner rail D34. In addition, the game area D30 includes a plurality of game nails and windmills (not shown), various general winning ports, a first main game start port A10, a second main game start port B10, an auxiliary game start port H10, 1st grand prize opening C10, 2nd big prize opening C20, 1st main game symbol display device A20, 2nd main game symbol display device B20, production display device SG, auxiliary game symbol display device H20, center decoration D38 and out mouth D36 is installed. Hereinafter, each element will be described in detail.

  Next, the first main game start opening A10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the first main game. As a specific configuration, the first main game start opening A10 includes a first main game start opening entrance detection device A11s. Here, the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball into the first main game start entrance A10, and the first main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated.

  Next, the second main game start opening B10 is installed as a start winning opening corresponding to the second main game. Specifically, the second main game start port B10 includes a second main game start port entrance detection device B11s and a second main game start port electric accessory B11d. Here, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the second main game start entrance B10, and the second main game start that indicates the entrance at the time of entrance. The entrance ball information is generated. Next, the second main game start port electric accessory B11d is changed between a closed state in which a game ball is difficult to win in the second main game start port B10 and an open state in which the game ball is more likely to win than the normal state.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, and the second main game start port A10 is present due to the presence of the first main game start port A10. The upper part of the game start opening B10 is blocked. Both the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) and the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) are the first main game start opening A10. And it is comprised so that it may be guide | induced to 2nd main game start opening B10.

  In the present embodiment, the electric combination is provided on the second main game start opening B10 side. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the electric combination is provided on the first main game start opening A10 side. May be. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the first main game start port A10 and the second main game start port B10 are arranged so as to overlap each other, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first main game start port You may comprise so that A10 and 2nd main game start opening B10 may be spaced apart. In the case of such a configuration, a member for closing the upper part of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d may be provided. In addition, the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided to the first main game start port A10, but is difficult to be guided to the second main game start port B10. The game ball flowing down on the right side (based on the center of the game area) may not be guided to the first main game start port A10, but may be configured to be easily guided to the second main game start port B10. It should be noted that “easy to be guided” and “not easily guided” are determined, for example, by the magnitude of the number of entered balls when 10,000 balls are launched to the right and left, respectively.

  Next, the auxiliary game start port H10 includes an auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s. Here, the auxiliary game start port entrance detection device H11s is a sensor that detects the entrance of a game ball to the auxiliary game start port H10, and generates auxiliary game start port entrance information indicating the entrance at the time of entrance. To do. Note that the entry of the game ball into the auxiliary game start port H10 triggers a lottery to expand the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the auxiliary game start opening H10 is such that the game ball flowing down the right side of the game area D30 (referenced to the center of the game area) is easily guided and the game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 is It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided {but is not limited to this, and it is configured so that a game ball flowing down the left side of the game area D30 (based on the center of the game area) is easily guided to the auxiliary game start opening H10. (For example, auxiliary game start ports H10 may be provided on the left and right of the game area D30, respectively)}.

  Next, on the upper right side of the out mouth D36, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20 are arranged so as to overlap, and flow down to the right side of the gaming area D30 (referenced to the middle of the gaming area). The game ball is configured to easily pass through the area where the first grand prize winning opening C10 and the second big winning prize opening C20 are arranged before reaching the out opening D36.

  Next, the first grand prize opening C10 has a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, located on the upper right side of the out opening D36 and below the second large winning opening C20. Specifically, the first grand prize opening C10 includes a first grand prize opening prize detection device C11s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a first grand prize opening electric accessory C11d (and a first grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C13). Here, the first grand prize opening winning detection device C11s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the first big prize opening C10. Is generated. The first big prize opening electric accessory C11d changes the first big prize opening C10 to the first big prize opening C10 in a normal state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state in which the game ball is easy to win (first). 1) The first prize winning solenoid C13 is excited and varied). In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the second grand prize opening C20 is formed in a horizontal rectangular shape that is opened when the first main game symbol (special symbol) or the second main game symbol (special symbol) stops at the big hit symbol. It is a winning opening corresponding to the main game, which is located at the upper right of the opening D36 and above the first big winning opening C10. Specifically, the second grand prize opening C20 includes a second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s for detecting the entry of a game ball, and a second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d (and a second grand prize prize). Mouth solenoid C23). Here, the second grand prize opening prize detection device C21s is a sensor that detects the entry of a game ball into the second big prize opening C20, and the second big prize opening entry information that indicates the entry at the time of entry. Is generated. The game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening C20 is configured to be detected by the second big prize opening prize detection device C21s. Next, the second grand prize opening electric accessory C21d places the second big prize opening C20 into the second grand prize opening C20 in a normal state where a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. Make it variable. In the present embodiment, the mode of the big winning opening is a mode in which a horizontal rectangular shape is formed and the game ball is variable between a normal state where the game ball cannot be won or difficult to win and an open state where the game ball is easy to win. It is not limited to. In that case, for example, an aspect (so-called, a state where the bar-like member provided in the special winning opening is in a state of protruding to the player side and a retracted state of being retracted to the player side) (Bello-type attacker), which is suitable when it is desired to ensure that the number of balls entered into the big prize opening is a predetermined number (for example, 10).

  Next, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) is related to the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) corresponding to the first main game (second main game symbol). It is a device that executes the display and the like. Specifically, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) includes a first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) and a first main game game. And a symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h). Here, the first main game symbol hold display portion A21h (second main game symbol hold display portion B21h) is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps is the first main game (second main game). This corresponds to the number of random numbers held (the number of main game symbols that have not been executed). The first main game symbol display unit A21g (second main game symbol display unit B21g) is configured with, for example, a 7-segment LED, and the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) is “0” to “9”. ”Is displayed with 10 types of numbers and“ − ”of losing {but not limited to this, a 7-segment LED is set so that it is difficult for the player to recognize which main game symbol is displayed. It is preferable to use and display by a symbol or the like. In addition, the hold number display is not limited to being composed of four lamps, but can be configured to display a maximum of four hold numbers (for example, composed of one lamp, (Equation 1: lighting, hold number 2: slow blink, hold number 3: medium blink, hold number 4: fast blink)).

  Since the first main game symbol (second main game symbol) does not necessarily have an effect role, in this embodiment, the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20). The size of is set to be inconspicuous. However, in the case of adopting a technique that does not display the first decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) by giving the first main gaming symbol (second main gaming symbol) itself an effect role, an effect described later You may comprise so that a 1st main game symbol (2nd main game symbol) may be displayed on a liquid crystal display like display apparatus SG.

  Next, the effect display device SG is a device that displays an effect image including a decorative symbol that fluctuates and stops in conjunction with the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol. Here, as a specific configuration, the effect display device SG includes a display area SG10 where an effect is executed including a variable display of decorative symbols. Here, the display area SG10 includes a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) that displays main game hold information, and a moving image of a plurality of rows of decorative symbols imitating, for example, a slot machine game. And a decorative symbol display area SG11 for displaying. The effect display device SG is configured with a liquid crystal display in the present embodiment, but may be configured with other display means such as a mechanical drum or LED. Next, the first hold display section SG12 (and the second hold display section SG13) is composed of four lamps, and the lamps are linked with the hold lamp of the main game symbol.

  Next, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 is a device that executes display related to the auxiliary game symbols. As a specific configuration, the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 includes an auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g and an auxiliary game symbol hold display unit H21h. Here, the auxiliary game symbol hold display portion H21h is composed of four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamps corresponds to the number of auxiliary game symbol changes held (the number of auxiliary game symbol changes not being executed).

  Next, the center decoration D38 is installed around the effect display device SG, and has functions such as a flow path of the game ball, protection of the effect display device SG, and decoration. In addition, the game effect lamp D26 is provided in a game area D30 or an area other than the game area D30, and plays a role of effect by blinking or the like.

  Next, the basic structure on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko gaming machine controls the overall operation of the pachinko gaming machine, and in particular controls overall game operations such as lottery when entering the first main game starting port A10 (second main game starting port B10) (ie, game Main control board M that performs control directly related to the profits of the player, and effect control means (sub-main control unit) that performs display control and the like related to various effects on the effect display device SG that adds interest to the game content SM, a sub-sub control unit SS that mainly performs effect display, and a game ball supplied from the prize ball tank KT in accordance with the prize winning to the prize ball tank KT, the prize ball rail KR, and each prize opening, A prize ball payout device (set base) KE including a payout unit KE10 and the like, a prize ball payout control board KH for controlling a payout operation by the payout unit KE10, and a game ball (reserved ball) in the upper ball tray D20 To region D30 Turning on / off the launching device D42 that launches each ball, the launch control board D40 that controls the launching operation of the launching device D42, the power supply unit E that supplies power to each part of the pachinko gaming machine, and the pachinko gaming machine A power switch Ea or the like, which is a switch, is provided on the back of the front frame D14 (on the opposite side to the game side).

  Next, an electrical schematic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, as described above, pays out a game ball based on the main control board M that controls the progress of the game and information (signals, commands, etc.) from the main control board M. Based on information (signals, commands, etc.) from the prize ball payout control board KH to be controlled, various effects on the effect display device SG, such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, A sub-control board S (in this example, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub-control unit SS are arranged on one board) for controlling execution of the lighting of the game effect lamp D26, error notification, etc., and these A power supply unit E that supplies power to the entire gaming machine including the control board is mainly configured. Here, the sub-control board S is a sub-main control unit SM that controls various effects on the effect display device SG such as variation / stop of decorative symbols, sound from the speaker D24, lighting of the game effect lamp D26, and error notification. And two control units of a sub-sub control unit SS that performs display processing such as a decorative symbol change display / stop display and a hold display or a notice display on the effect display device SG. The main control board M, the winning ball payout control board KH, the sub-main control unit SM, and the sub-sub control unit SS are a CPU that performs various arithmetic processes, and a ROM that stores programs that prescribe the arithmetic processes of the CPU and CPU RAM that temporarily stores data (various data generated during the game, computer programs read from the ROM, etc.) is installed. Here, although not particularly illustrated, the ROM mounted on the main control board M may be configured not to provide an unused area in order to prevent a program or the like modified by an illegal act from being written. It is preferable (for example, all unused areas are filled with zeros, and used areas are filled in young addresses and written). Also, in order to prevent reference to data that is not normally referenced due to noise or fraudulent behavior, unused data (for example, data referenced in gaming machines with different specifications or used only for testing at the development stage) It is preferable that the data is not provided. Similarly, when the RAM area is used, it is preferable that the area is used at a young address and an unused program area is not provided. Hereinafter, a schematic configuration of each substrate and an electrical connection mode between each substrate / device will be outlined.

  First, the main control board M has a winning opening sensor Ns {the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s, the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s, the auxiliary game start entrance entrance detection device H11s, 1st prize winning opening prize detection device C11s, 2nd big prize winning prize winning detection apparatus C21s, general winning detection apparatus (not shown, the general winning entry is a winning entry with a winning ball but no symbol lottery. )}, Drive solenoids (not shown) such as the first big prize winning solenoid C13, the second big prize winning solenoid C23, etc., information display LEDs (not shown), etc. that are essential for the progress of the game. It is electrically connected to the device, and the progress of the game is controlled based on the input signal from each input device. Further, the main control board M is also electrically connected to the prize ball payout control board KH and the sub control board S (sub-main control unit SM / sub-sub control unit SS). For example, information (commands) related to performance / game progress can be transmitted to the sub-control board S. The main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC or the like via an external connection terminal (not shown), and the main control board M can be connected to the hall computer HC via an external connection terminal. The game-related information can be output from an external device to an external device.

  In the present embodiment, as indicated by the arrows in FIG. 3, the main control board M and the winning ball payout control board KH are configured to be capable of bidirectional communication, while the main control board M and the sub main The control unit SM is configured to allow one-way communication from the main control board M to the sub-main control unit SM (the communication method may be either serial communication or parallel communication). The communication between control boards (between control devices) may be one-way communication or two-way communication.

  Next, the prize ball payout control board KH is a prize ball payout apparatus KE that executes payout of game balls, and an apparatus that can be operated by a player, accepts a game ball rental request, and receives the prize ball payout control board KH. It is connected to a game ball lending device R for transmission. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, the control circuit unit of the launching device is provided in the prize ball payout control board, and the prize ball payout control board and the launching device (launching handle, firing motor, ball feeding device). Etc.). In the present embodiment, the game ball lending device R is used as a separate body and is adjacent to the game machine. However, the game ball lending device R may be integrated with the game machine. Control and management control of a recording medium for lending such as electronic money may be integrated.

  Next, the sub-control board S is connected to the effect display device SG for displaying decorative symbols and the like, the speaker D24, the game effect lamp D26, and other effect drive devices (not shown) as described above. . In the present embodiment, as described above, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are provided in the sub-control board S, and control of the sound output from the speaker D24 by the sub-main control unit SM and game effects ( Lighting) The lighting control of the lamp D26 and the determination control of the display contents to be displayed on the effect display device are performed, and the display control (substantial display control) on the effect display device is performed by the sub-sub control unit SS. It is configured. In the present embodiment, the sub-main control unit SM and the sub-sub control unit SS are configured to be integrated on the sub-control board S. However, the present invention is not limited to this (configured as a separate board). However, it is possible to reduce the situation that space is merited and noise is mixed into the wiring or the like by being configured to be integrated). Also, the work sharing between the two control units can be changed as appropriate, for example, the voice control is executed by the sub-sub control unit SS (suitable when a voice control circuit integrated with the VDP is adopted). Further, an electronic value may be given without giving a physical prize ball as a prize ball.

  Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the block diagram of FIG. First, the main control board M is a game peripheral device related to the game (first main game peripheral device A, second main game peripheral device B, first and second main game shared peripheral device C, auxiliary game peripheral device H), A sub-main control unit SM (sub-game control means SM) related to the performance is connected to a prize ball payout control board KH that performs payout control of a predetermined number of prize balls based on a payout instruction from the main control board M so that information can be transmitted. ing. Further, the sub main control unit SM (sub game control means SM) is electrically connected to the sub sub control unit SS (effect display means SS) for executing image effects, various game effect lamps D26 (for example, side lamps), speakers D24, and the like. It is connected. Further, the prize ball payout control board KH is electrically connected to a prize ball payout device KE including a stepping motor, a sprocket, and the like. The main control board M, sub main control part SM (sub game control means SM), sub sub control part SS (effect display means SS), prize ball payout control board KH, etc. store data and programs in hardware. ROM, RAM, and elements such as a CPU used for arithmetic processing. In the following description, each means included in the main control board M may be configured to be mounted on a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device). For example, each means that is included in a peripheral device (for example, a game peripheral device) may be configured to be mounted on the main control board M. The details of each means (device) will be described below.

  First, the main control board M has a game information control means MJ for controlling the acquisition of game information, a game content determination means MN for determining the contents of the game, and the progress of games such as special games and specific games. And the game progress means MP that manages the current and past game states [e.g., state relating to the main game {normal game state, specific game state (probability varying game state, time-reduced game state), special game state}, state relating to the auxiliary game (Easy release state, non-easy release state), stop symbol and variation mode information related to main game symbol and auxiliary game symbol, on / off status of various flags, game status during special game (for example, number of rounds and winning number information) ] Game state temporary storage means MB for temporarily storing, and various game information {for example, stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information {for example, 16R big hit, 8R big hit, 4 Jackpots, loses}, information on variation modes (for example, variation time), special game start signal / status information / end signal, hold information, etc.} for transmitting information transmission control means MT (and unsent commands) A command transmission buffer MT10), and a winning ball payout determining means MH for controlling the winning ball payout control board KH so as to pay out a predetermined winning ball based on winning of game balls to various winning holes. Yes.

  Here, the game information control means MJ determines whether or not each random number can be acquired, and the entrance determination means MJ10 for determining the inflow of game balls to each entrance (starting opening, etc.), and the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 for acquiring each random number based on the above, and holding control means MJ30 for temporarily storing the ball entering each starting port during the variable display as a holding ball within the upper limit number. doing. In addition, the game progression means MP directly determines the opening / closing of the display control means MP10 for performing control to change and stop each symbol, and the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d of the second main game start opening B10. Second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B for performing various related processes, special game control means MP30 for controlling a special game advantageous to the player over the normal game, and a first main game Regarding the game, the second main game, and the auxiliary game, the determination of which game state the current game state is to be transferred to and the first grand prize without the change of the game state (probability variation game state, time-reduced game state) It has a small hit game control means MP40 that manages the execution of a small hit game that can open the mouth C10, and a specific game control means MP50 for performing a process of shifting the game state based on the determination. Hereinafter, each means will be described in detail.

  First, the entrance determination means MJ10 includes a first main game start entrance entrance determination means MJ11-A that determines whether or not a game ball has entered the first main game start entrance A10, and a second main game start entrance. The second main game start port entrance determining means MJ11-B for determining whether or not a game ball has entered B10, and the auxiliary game start port for determining whether or not a game ball has flowed into the auxiliary game start port H10 In the first winning prize entrance determining means MJ11-C10 and the second winning prize opening C20, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the first winning prize opening C10. And a second grand prize opening entrance determining means MJ11-C20 for determining whether or not a game ball has entered.

  Next, the random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20 determines whether or not to acquire the first main game side random number based on the game ball entering the first main game start opening A10, and according to the determination result, To first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A for acquiring random numbers (for example, first winning random number, first variation mode determining random number, first main game symbol determining random number, etc.) and second main game starting port B10 And determining whether or not to acquire the second main game random number based on the incoming game ball, and depending on the determination result, the random number (for example, the second winning random number, the second variation mode determining random number, the second main random number, A second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B for acquiring a game symbol determination random number and the like, and whether or not the auxiliary game side selection random number can be acquired, and an auxiliary game for acquiring the random number based on the determination result Random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H There.

  Here, the “random number” in the claims and the present specification including the above is, for example, “0” to “65535” or “random number” assigned according to the type of random number (for example, a winning random number or a variation mode determining random number). It is a value randomly selected from a predetermined range such as “0” to “255”. The random number may not be a mathematically generated random number, but may be a pseudo random number generated by a hardware random number, a software random number, or the like. For example, the expression method of each value in the random number is a method in which the value is expressed in order along the random number sequence (plus one method), the next value when the final value of the random number sequence is expressed (initial value) ) With a contingent value (initial value update method), a combination of these, and the like. By acquiring a random number by such a method, it is possible to generate an aperiodic random number that is difficult to be predicted by the player. Conversely, for example, in the case of a method for generating a next random number using a random number used in a certain lottery, the next random number is likely to be predicted. Therefore, when generating a random number, it is preferable to generate a new random number without using the random number used in the previous lottery.

  Next, the hold control means MJ30 uses the hold digest control means MJ31 for controlling the processing related to the hold digest and the change start, and the first main game side random number obtained in a situation where the first main game symbol change permission has not been granted. It is determined whether or not to temporarily store, and based on the determination result, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32 for holding the random number in the first main game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-A until the symbol variation permission is granted. -It is determined whether to temporarily store the second main game random number acquired in a situation where the second main game symbol variation permission has not been granted, and the random number is given the symbol variation permission based on the determination result The second main game symbol hold means MJ32-B for holding in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the auxiliary game acquired in a situation where the auxiliary game symbol change permission is not granted It is determined whether or not the random number is temporarily stored, and based on the determination result, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H for holding the random number in the auxiliary game symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H until the symbol variation permission is granted. And have.

  Here, the pending digest control means MJ31 has a change start condition satisfaction determination means MJ31j for determining whether or not a condition for starting change is satisfied.

  Next, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B and the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H can store a maximum of four, and combine the random numbers with the holding order. The first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A, the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H for temporary storage in the form Have.

  Next, the game content determination means MN makes a special game if the result of the lottery is a winning lottery means MN10 for lottery of whether or not the special game is successful and whether or not the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is open. Special game transition determining means MN20 for determining the transition of each symbol, for example, symbol content determining means MN40 for determining the stop symbol of each symbol based on each random number, and each random number Based on the above, the variation mode determining means MN50 for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of each symbol, and the limited frequency variation mode determination for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the main game symbol at the limited frequency described later. Means MN52. Here, the success / failure lottery means MN10 is a first main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-A that performs a success / failure lottery on the first main game symbol, and a second main game winner / rejection lottery unit that performs a success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol. It has MN11-B, and auxiliary game winning / failing lottery means MN11-H for making a winning / losing lottery regarding the auxiliary game symbols. Here, the first main game success / failure lottery means MN11-A, the second main game winner / rejection lottery means MN11-B, and the auxiliary game success / failure lottery means MN11-H are referred to when performing the success / failure lottery with respect to the first main game symbol. The first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A, the second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B referred to when performing the success / failure lottery on the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol on / off lottery Each of which has an auxiliary gaming success / failure lottery table MN11ta-H that is referred to when performing. Further, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 is a table that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the main game symbol at the limited frequency, such as the game state and the number of variations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game. The reference frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta composed of a plurality of tables configured to determine the table to be referred to, and the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta at the time of the limit frequency A is referred to. Which of the limited frequency counter AMN52c that counts the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol after the end of the special game and the limited frequency fluctuation mode determination lottery table MN52ta to be referred to at the time of the frequency B To determine the number of times the main game symbol has changed since the end of the special game. A pointer BMN52c-2, has a limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b for temporarily storing information relating to limited frequency (the flag on or off, etc.). When the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table). When referring to MN51ta-B), (1) refer to a common table and change the selection rate of the variation mode (that is, the variation mode itself to be selected is the same, but the selection rate is different), (2) Although the variation mode and the selection rate to be selected are the same, a further fixed value is added to the variation time value related to the selected variation mode. (3) Different variation mode {first main game variation mode There is a variation mode that does not exist in the determination lottery table MN51ta-A (the second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), (4) all variations that can be selected May be configured to like is different. An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later.

  Here, the limited frequency means that the type and / or selection rate of the variation mode of the main game symbol after the specific symbol is stopped and displayed is the variation mode of the main game symbol before the specific symbol is stopped and displayed. This is a state (a limited frequency state, that is, a state in which a special variation pattern table is selected only during a specific variation period) that is different from the type and / or selection rate. In addition to the specific symbol being stopped, the limited frequency state is triggered by the opening of the big winning opening, the stop of the symbol (big winning symbol, small winning symbol, etc.) that triggers the opening of the big winning opening, or a certain timing. The passage of a predetermined number of fluctuations or the like may be made from (a timing such as a specific symbol stop, a change start after the stop, etc.). The special variation pattern table refers to each gaming state (probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, probability variation gaming state and non-time shortening gaming state, non-probability variation gaming state and time shortening gaming state, non-probability variation gaming. Main game table 3 referenced in the state and non-time-reduced gaming state (not only in a limited period in the current gaming state, but in the next big hit, small hit or a specific symbol of the current gaming state It is a variation mode determination lottery table other than the variation mode determination lottery table referred to until the stop. The state referring to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta is hereinafter referred to as the limited frequency (particularly, the one involving the state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easily opened). At the time of frequency A, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d may be called a limited frequency state, during a limited frequency, etc.

  Here, when executing the lottery determination based on the main game random number, the success / failure lottery means MN10 determines whether or not the main game random number value is the same as any one of all the winning random number values, If some or all of the random number values are continuous numbers, the main game random number value is equal to or less than the upper limit value of the hit random number value and is determined to determine whether it is greater than or equal to the lower limit value. . By executing such determination as to whether or not it is correct, accurate determination processing can be executed. On the contrary, when the determination is made by comparison with only the upper limit of the hit random number range, or only with the lower limit, the value at the end of the random number range (for example, when the range of the random number value is 0 to 1023, 0 or 1023) needs to be a random number value, making it vulnerable to fraud (for example, fraudulent action of passing current through the main control board M, where all bits in the storage area are likely to be 0 or 1). There is a risk of end. In this example, one lottery is executed using one random number {when a plurality of random numbers are used for one lottery (so-called two-stage lottery is executed), two random numbers are used. Because it needs to be prevented from synchronizing}.

  Next, the symbol content determination means MN40 and the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A for determining the stop symbol of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first main game random number) and the acquisition Based on the determined game content determination random number (second main game random number), the second main game symbol determining means MN41-B for determining the stop symbol of the second main game symbol, and the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number Auxiliary game symbol determining means MN41-H for determining the stop symbol of the game.

  Here, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A has a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the first main game symbol, The first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, for the normal game → the first main game normal game state). Lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game symbol determination means MN41-B has a second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B that is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the second main game symbol. The second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, for the game state, the normal game → the second main game normal game state lottery). Table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game symbol determination means MN41-H has an auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H which is referred to when determining a stop symbol related to the auxiliary game symbol. The table MN41ta-H has various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time shortening game → auxiliary game time lottery table).

  Next, the variation mode determination unit MN50 determines the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the first main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (first primary game random number). MN 51-A and second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the second main game symbol based on the acquired game content determination random number (second main game random number), And auxiliary game variation mode determining means MN51-H for determining the variation mode (variation time, etc.) of the auxiliary game symbol based on the acquired auxiliary game symbol winning random number.

  Here, the first main game variation mode determination means MN51-A has a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the first main game symbol. The first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the game state (for example, regarding the game state, normal game → first main game normal (Game state lottery table, probability variation game → first main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → first main game time reduction game state lottery table). The second main game variation mode determination means MN51-B has a second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B which is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the second main game symbol. The second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B includes various lottery tables that differ depending on the result of the success / failure and the gaming state (for example, regarding the gaming state, normal game → second main game normal game) State lottery table, probability variation game → second main game probability variation game state lottery table, time reduction game → second main game time reduction game state lottery table). An example of a detailed table configuration will be described later. Further, the auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51-H has an auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-H that is referred to when determining the variation mode related to the auxiliary game symbol. The determination lottery table MN51ta-H includes various winning tables that differ depending on the gaming state (normal game → auxiliary game normal lottery table, probability variation game and time reduction game → auxiliary game time reduction lottery table).

  Next, the display control means MP10 performs a predetermined time on the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 and on the second main game symbol display unit B21g of the second main game symbol display device B20. The first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C for controlling to stop display after changing the first main game symbol and the auxiliary game symbol display unit H21g of the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are assisted for a predetermined time. Auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H for controlling to stop and display after changing the game symbol is provided.

  Here, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C has first and second main game symbol fluctuation management timers MP11t-C (decrement counter) that can be cleared to zero. Further, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H further includes an auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H capable of measuring time.

  Next, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines whether or not the condition for performing the process of opening / closing the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is satisfied. The second main game start port electric player opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B and the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t for measuring the driving (opening) time of the second main game start port electric player B11d -B.

  Next, when the special game control means MP30 satisfies the condition determination means MP31 for determining whether or not the condition for shifting to the special game is satisfied, and the special game transfer condition, the contents of the special game (Specifically, the big winning opening to be opened, the number of rounds, the time between rounds, etc.) are determined and set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Special game execution means MP33 for executing a special game (big hit) for opening the mouth C10 or the second grand prize port C20 in a predetermined condition, and time management of various processes related to the special game (for example, the first grand prize port) Special game time management means MP34 for performing C10 and opening / closing time of the second big prize opening C20). Here, the special game executing means MP33 includes first and second prize winning opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP33-C for opening and closing the first prize winning opening electric accessory C11d and the second prize winning opening electric accessory C21d. , A winning ball counter MP33c for measuring winning balls to the first big winning opening C10 and the second big winning opening C20 is provided. The special game time management means MP34 further includes a special game timer MP34t for managing the round time. The special game content determination means MP32 further includes a special game content reference table MP32ta that is referred to when specifying the content of the special game to be set in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b (table) Details are not shown).

  Next, the small hit game control means MP40 is a small hit game timer MP41t for measuring the opening time of the first big prize opening C10 in the small hit game, and the small hit game related information for temporarily storing information related to the small hit game. Temporary storage means MP40b.

  Next, the specific game control means MP50 satisfies the probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 for determining whether or not the end condition for the probability variation game state is satisfied, and whether or not the end condition for the time-reduced game state is satisfied. Has a short-time game end condition determining means MP52. Here, the short-time game end condition determining means MP52 has a short-time number counter MP52c capable of counting the short-time number. Here, the “specific game” means, for example, a probability variation game in which a lottery probability for a special game is higher than that in a normal game or a time shortening game in which the variation time of the main game symbol is relatively shorter than that in a normal game. Point to.

  Here, in the present embodiment, during the time reduction game, the variation time of the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol is relatively shortened (time reduction) compared to during the non-time reduction game. function). Further, the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol is also relatively shortened, and the open extension time of the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is relatively extended (open time extension function). Also, the time-reduced game in the present embodiment ends when the total value of the number of changes of the first main game symbol and the number of times of change of the second main game symbol exceeds a predetermined number (probability variation game with no time limit restriction). except for). That is, the number of time reductions is configured to be subtracted every time the first main game symbol and the second main game symbol fluctuate (stop). The probability variation game end condition determination means MP51 and the short time game end condition determination means MP52 described above are, for example, a lottery to shift from a specific game (for example, a probability variation game or a time-reduced game) to a normal game with a predetermined probability every time the symbol changes. (A so-called pachinko gaming machine having a falling lottery function).

  Next, the game state temporary storage means MB includes the first main game (game from the change of the first main game symbol to the stop) and the second main game (from the change of the second main game symbol to the stop). First and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C for temporarily storing the current game state in the game) and auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10- for temporarily storing the current game state in the auxiliary game Special game-related information temporary storage means for temporarily storing H and the current game state in the special game (for example, the number of rounds, the number of winning game balls in an arbitrary round, on / off of various flags related to special games, etc.) Specific game-related information for temporarily storing the MB20b and the current game state in the specific game (for example, the remaining number of time reductions, ON / OFF of various flags related to the specific game, etc.) Has a storage means MB30b, the.

  Here, the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C are stopped according to the first or second main game symbol that is currently changing (the first or second main game symbol that satisfies the change start condition). There are first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C for temporarily storing symbols and variation mode information.

  Further, the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H temporarily stores auxiliary game symbol information for temporarily storing information such as stop symbols related to the currently changing auxiliary game symbols (auxiliary game symbols for which the change start condition is satisfied). Means MB11b-H.

  Next, game peripheral devices will be described. Since some of the peripheral devices have already been described in detail, the remaining configuration will be briefly described. First, the game peripheral devices are a first main game peripheral device A that is a peripheral device on the first main game side, a second main game peripheral device B that is a peripheral device on the second main game side, and a first main game side. First and second main game shared peripheral device C, which is a shared peripheral device on the second main game side, auxiliary game peripheral device H related to auxiliary games, sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM, sub sub control unit SS (and effect display device SG) and the like. Here, the effects controlled by the sub-main control unit SM include the variation of the first main game symbol and the variation of the second main game symbol and the variation of the decorative symbol in a form synchronized in time with the result of the game. It concerns only the display of information that has no effect. Hereinafter, these peripheral devices will be described in order.

  First, the first main game peripheral device A includes a first main game start opening A10 that triggers the transition to a special game, and a first main game symbol display device A20 that can display stop and change display of the first main game symbol. ,have.

  Next, the second main game peripheral device B has a second main game start port B10 that triggers the transition to the special game, and a second main game symbol display device B20 that can display stop and change display of the second main game symbol. And have.

  Next, the first and second main game shared peripheral device C is in a closed state during a normal game, and is opened under a predetermined condition during a special game (big hit). And a second grand prize opening C20.

  Next, the auxiliary game peripheral device H includes the auxiliary game start port H10 that triggers the opening of the second main game start port electric accessory B11d of the second main game start port B10, and the stop display and change display of the auxiliary game symbols. And an auxiliary game symbol display device H20 capable of supporting the above.

  Next, the effect display control means (sub-main control unit) SM includes display information receiving means SM10 for receiving various information from the main control board M side, effect content determination processing and display control processing for effect display. Effect display control means SM20 that controls the information transmission / reception control means SM40 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-sub control unit SS side. Hereafter, each said means is explained in full detail.

  First, the display information receiving means SM10 has main-side information temporary storage means SM11b for temporarily storing symbol information and display instruction information related to the first main game and the second main game from the main control board M side. .

  Next, the effect display control means SM20 is a decorative symbol display control means SM21 that controls the decorative pattern variation mode and stop symbol determination processing and display control processing, and the decorative symbol display control processing that holds the decorative symbol hold count management and hold display processing. Information display control means SM22, hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 for executing the hold prefetch effect, background effect display control means SM23 that controls background image determination processing and display control processing, notification effect content determination processing, and It has a notice effect display control means SM24 that controls the display control process, and a reach effect display control means SM25 that controls the determination process of the reach effect contents and the display control process.

  Here, the decorative design display control means SM21 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the display design content determination means SM21n for determining the stop design and the variation mode of the decorative design, and the decorative design display variation SM21n. The drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b for temporarily storing various information (variation mode information, stop symbol information, various flags, etc.), and the drawing variation time management timer SM21t for timing the variation time of the decorative symbols; ,have. Here, the drawing display content determination means SM21n further includes a drawing variation content determination lottery (reference) table SM21ta that is referred to when determining the stop symbol and variation mode of the decorative symbol (details of the table). (Not shown).

  Next, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 has a drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b for temporarily storing information relating to the hold related to the decorative design.

  Next, the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 is a hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k that determines whether or not the hold prefetch effect can be executed, and a prefetch related information temporary storage means SM26b that temporarily stores information related to the hold prefetch. ,have.

  Next, the background effect display control means SM23 temporarily stores information related to the background effect display content determining means SM23n for determining the display content of the background effect based on the information from the main control board M side. Background production related information temporary storage means SM23b for the stay stage {a group of production systems, and the stay stage is different, the notice production, the background production, the reach production, the sound mode, etc. (or may be different) , The awake stage stay counter SM23c that measures the number of fluctuations staying in the “wake stage” and the “devil stage” among the stay stages. And a devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 for measuring the number of fluctuations staying at the “devil stage”. .

  Next, the notice effect display control means SM24 is based on the information from the main control board M side, the notice effect display content determining means SM24n for determining the display content and display timing of the notice effect, and the information related to the notice effect display. Is temporarily stored in advance notice related information SM24b.

  Next, the reach effect display control means SM25 is based on information from the main control board M side, reach effect display content determining means SM25n for determining the display content and display timing of the reach effect, and information related to the reach effect display. Reach production related information temporary storage means SM25b.

  Further, the effect display means (sub-sub control part) SS displays an image on the display area SG10 on the effect display device SG and the sub-information transmission / reception control means SS10 that controls information transmission / reception with the sub-main control part SM side. Control means SS20. Here, the image display control means SS20 further includes image display related information temporary storage means SS21b for temporarily storing commands received from the sub-main control unit SM side and information relating to various image displays.

  The effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is electrically connected to an effect display device SG that displays an image related to the effect based on information from the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS. Here, the effect display device SG has a display area SG10 for displaying an image.

  Here, the display area SG10 has a decoration symbol display area SG11 for variably displaying a decoration symbol, and a first hold display section SG12 (and a second hold display section SG13) for displaying main game hold information. ing.

  The first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are connected to the main control board M so as to be able to transmit information, and the remaining effect display means (sub-sub control unit) ) SS is connected to the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM so as to be able to transmit information. That is, the first main game symbol display device A20, the second main game symbol display device B20, and the auxiliary game symbol display device H20 are controlled by the main control board M, and the effect display means (sub-sub control unit) SS is sub-game control. Meaning that it is controlled by means (sub-main control unit) SM. Note that another peripheral device may be controlled via the main control board M and another peripheral device controlled by one-way communication (one-way communication).

  From here, an example of a general processing flow in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described using a flowchart. The flowchart is mainly composed of processing steps (illustrated by rectangles), judgments (illustrated by diamonds), flow lines (arrows), terminals indicating start / end / return, etc. (illustrated by rounded rectangles). . Moreover, when the details are illustrated in another flowchart among the processing steps, those referring to the other flowchart are illustrated as a subroutine (illustrated by a rectangle in which the left and right lines are double lines). . Here, in the development stage of gaming machines, gaming machines with different specifications are also developed at the same time, but in this example, a subroutine ( (Subroutines that are not normally used) are not left behind, and processing related to unused subroutines that are not normally executed due to noise or fraudulent actions is prevented from being executed.

  First, FIG. 5 is a main flowchart showing the flow of general processing performed by the main control board M. After powering on the gaming machine, the process of FIG. That is, after the game machine is turned on and initialized (not shown), in step 1002, the main control board M confirms the input port of the RAM clear button and the reset button (RAM clear) of the power supply unit E. Button) has been operated, that is, whether or not an operation of clearing the contents of the RAM has been performed intentionally by a game hall manager or the like. In the case of Yes in step 1002, in step 1004, the main control board M clears all the RAM contents (for example, information in the game state temporary storage means MB) on the main control board M side. Next, in step 1006, the information transmission control means MT transmits ram clear information (command) indicating that the RAM of the main control board M has been cleared to the sub main control unit SM side (even if it is transmitted at this timing). Alternatively, a command may be set at this timing and transmitted by a control command transmission process described later), and the process proceeds to step 1016. On the other hand, if No in step 1002, the main control board M checks the contents of the RAM area in the main control board M in step 1008 (for example, the checksum recorded at the time of power interruption and the RAM area are stored in the RAM area). Comparison with the amount of information). Next, in step 1010, the main control board M determines whether or not the contents of the RAM are not normal based on the check result (whether or not the information at the time of power interruption is accurately backed up in the RAM). If YES in step 1010, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is abnormal, the process proceeds to step 1004 (RAM clear process described above). On the other hand, if the data backed up to the RAM in Step 1010 is normal, that is, if the data backed up in the RAM is normal, the main control board M is stored (backed up) in the RAM in the main control board M in Step 1012. The information command is acquired, and in step 1014, the acquired various information commands are transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side (the command may be transmitted at the timing, or the command is set at the timing and described later. It may be configured to transmit by transmission processing), and the process proceeds to step 1016. Next, in step 1016, the main control board M is triggered by a scheduled execution interrupt (for example, about every 1.5 ms) related to the main process on the main control board M side shown in FIG. However, in this example, the interrupt period is set to T) (as a result, when the execution scheduled interrupt timing is reached, (b) in FIG. 11 is executed), the process proceeds to step 1018. . After step 1018, the main control board M repeatedly executes various random number update processing (for example, random number counter increment processing) until the next scheduled interrupt timing is reached.

  It should be noted that the initial value of the temporary storage area (RAM or the like) mounted on the main control board M is preferably configured not to be a value at which a special game is executed (immediately after starting the program processing, noise or fraudulent behavior). In order to prevent the special game from being erroneously executed when the process for determining whether to execute the special game has been executed.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control board M executes the process shown in FIG. 5B based on the interrupt request generated when the scheduled interrupt timing is reached. That is, triggered by the arrival of the scheduled interrupt period T (for example, a hardware interrupt about every 1.5 ms), in step 1100, the main control board M executes an auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition process described later. Next, at step 1200, the main control board M executes an electric accessory driving determination process described later. Next, in step 1300, the main control board M executes a main game content determination random number acquisition process which will be described later. Next, in step 1400, the main control board M executes a main game symbol display process described later. Next, at step 1600, the main control board M executes a special game operation condition determination process described later. Next, in step 1700, the main control board M executes a special game control process described later. Next, in step 1800, the main control board M executes a small hit game control process described later. Next, in step 1997, the main control board M (especially the winning ball payout determining means MH) receives the winning ball payout control process (drive control of the winning ball payout device KE, etc.) based on the winning opening where the game ball has won. The payout control board KH is executed, and a process for managing the result is executed. Next, in step 1998, the main control board M executes an external signal output process (information output to the external terminal board, the hall computer HC, etc.). Next, in step 1999, the main control board M executes a control command transmission process (transmits the command set in each process described above to the sub-main control unit side), and is executed immediately before the execution of this interrupt process. Return to the process that was being performed. In the control command transmission process, the order in which commands are received on the sub-main control unit SM side is important (for example, the process is normally executed by receiving another command after receiving a certain command). In some cases, the commands are transmitted in the order in which the main control board M determines to transmit the commands (in the order in which the commands are set).

  Next, NMI interrupt processing will be described. As described above, the main control board M is configured such that the power interruption signal from the reset IC is input to the NMI terminal of the CPU, and the processing of FIG. Is done. That is, when the gaming machine is powered off (in this example, when an NMI interrupt occurs), in step 1020, the main control board M sets power interruption information (for example, checksum) based on the information in the RAM area. Next, in step 1022, the main control board M prohibits writing to the RAM area, prohibits timer interrupt processing, and shifts to power-off waiting loop processing.

  Next, FIG. 6 is a flowchart of auxiliary game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1100 in FIG. First, in step 1102, the auxiliary game start port entrance determining means MJ11-H determines whether or not a game ball enters (inflow, passes in the case of a gate) at the auxiliary game start port H10. In the case of Yes in step 1102, in step 1104, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H, and whether or not the number of hold balls is not the upper limit (for example, 4). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1104, in step 1106, the auxiliary game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-H acquires an auxiliary game content determination random number (for example, an auxiliary game symbol winning random number). Next, in step 1108, the auxiliary game symbol holding means MJ32-H sets the random number together with information on how many pieces are held, in the auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-H. 1 is added, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1200). In addition, also when it is No in step 1102 or step 1104, it transfers to the next process (process of step 1200).

  Next, FIG. 7 is a flowchart of the electric accessory drive determination process according to the subroutine of step 1200 in FIG. First, in step 1202, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H and the electric accessory releasing flag is off. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 1202, in step 1204, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine whether or not the auxiliary game symbol changing flag is off. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1204, in step 1206, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H accesses the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H and determines whether or not there is a holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. . In the case of Yes in step 1206, in step 1216, the auxiliary gaming symbol determination means MN41-H refers to the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H to determine the auxiliary gaming side gaming state (flag state of the auxiliary gaming short time flag). In addition to the acquisition, the auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-H is referred to, and the stop symbol is determined based on the acquired auxiliary game side game state and the auxiliary game symbol random number based on the reserved ball (for example, the auxiliary game short time flag Is selected, the winning symbol is selected with a higher probability than in the case of being off) and temporarily stored in the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H. Next, in step 1218, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H sends the auxiliary game symbol change management timer MP11t-C to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C based on the auxiliary game side game state (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is on, and 30 seconds when the auxiliary game short flag is off) related to the variable time is set. In step 1220, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns on the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1222, the auxiliary gaming symbol holding means MJ32-H updates the holding information recorded in the auxiliary gaming symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-H after subtracting 1 from the holding ball related to the auxiliary gaming symbol. At the same time, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H starts the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-H, and then starts the auxiliary game symbol variation display on the auxiliary game symbol display section H21g.

  Next, at step 1224, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C to determine whether or not a predetermined time related to the variation time of the auxiliary game symbol has been reached. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1224, in step 1226, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H refers to the auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-H to acquire the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol, and the acquired auxiliary The stop symbol of the game symbol is confirmed and displayed on the auxiliary game symbol display portion H21g. In step 1228, the auxiliary game symbol control means MP11-H turns off the auxiliary game symbol changing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary game state temporary storage means MB10-H. Next, in step 1230, the second main game start opening electric accessory opening / closing condition determining means MP21-B determines whether or not the stop symbol of the auxiliary game symbol is “winning”. In the case of Yes in Step 1230, in Step 1232, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B determines the second main game based on the game state on the auxiliary game side (the flag state of the auxiliary game short time flag). A predetermined time (for example, 6 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is on, 0.5 seconds when the auxiliary game short time flag is off, and the predetermined time related to the opening time of the electric character in the start opening electric member release timer MP22t-B. Second). Next, in step 1234, the second main game start port electric accessory opening / closing control means MP20-B turns on the electric accessory releasing flag in the flag area of the auxiliary gaming state temporary storage means MB10-H. . Then, in step 1236, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B opens the second main game start port electric combination B11d. Next, in step 1238, the second main game start port electric player opening / closing control means MP20-B refers to the second main game start port electric player opening timer MP22t-B, and determines the electric player's opening time. It is determined whether or not the predetermined time has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1238, in step 1240 and step 1242, the second main game start port electric combination opening / closing control means MP20-B closes the second main game start port electric combination B11d and temporarily turns the auxiliary game state temporarily. The open flag of the electric accessory in the flag area of the storage means MB10-H is turned off, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1300).

  If NO in step 1202, the process proceeds to step 1238. If NO in step 1204, the process proceeds to step 1224. If NO in step 1206, step 1224, step 1230, or step 1238, the next process is performed. The process proceeds to (Step 1300).

  Further, in this flowchart, for the sake of convenience, after the stop symbol is displayed in step 1226, the process proceeds to the next step immediately, but the present invention is not limited to this. In that case, it may be configured to move to the next processing after a fixed stop display time of about 500 ms (for example, this processing is performed by performing branch processing using a stop display fixing flag and a timer). Achievable).

  Next, FIG. 8 is a flowchart of main game content determination random number acquisition processing according to the subroutine of step 1300 in FIG. First, in step 1302, the first main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-A receives the first main game start entrance entrance information from the first main game start entrance entrance detection device A11s of the first main game start entrance A10. Is received. In the case of Yes in step 1302, in step 1304, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A refers to the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A and determines the main game (especially the first main game). It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1304, in step 1306, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A acquires the first main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the first main game content determination random number, a winning lottery random number for determining whether or not to win, a symbol lottery random number for determining a winning symbol, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol are determined. The three random numbers of the variation mode lottery random numbers to acquire are acquired. Incidentally, these three random numbers are generated from random number generation means having different update periods and random number ranges, and are sequentially acquired at this timing. Next, in step 1308, the first main game symbol holding means MJ32-A temporarily stores (holds) the acquired first main game content determination random number in the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A. . Next, in step 1310, the hold control unit MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage unit MP40b, and executes the special game execution flag and the small hit execution flag. It is determined whether or not is off. In the case of Yes in step 1310, in step 1312, the hold control means MJ30 determines whether or not the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b is off. In the case of Yes in step 1312, in step 1314, the hold control means MJ30 pre-determines the result of the stored hold and the stop symbol based on the hold information (the lottery random number and symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1316, the hold control means MJ30 sets the command relating to the newly generated hold success / failure result and stop symbol information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1318. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the information related to the stop symbol determined in advance is transmitted to the sub-side, the prior determination result is the stop symbol related to the loss of the first main game “HA”. In the case of “HB”, a command related to a stop symbol different from that in the case of “HB” is transmitted to the sub-side (as shown in FIG. 13, in this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of stop symbols related to loss. ing).

  Next, in step 1318, the hold control means MJ30, based on the hold information (variation mode determination random number), the stored change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group (non-short-time change mode group and time-change mode) (Group) is determined in advance (refer to the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17 for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group). In the present embodiment, one variation mode group is configured to include a plurality of types of variation modes (variation times). Next, in step 1320, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to a new hold occurrence (a hold occurrence command of the first main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number separator information, etc.) to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999, and the process proceeds to step 1322. If the symbol information is configured to be transmitted to the sub side as in the present embodiment, an effect suggesting a big hit may be executed as an effect to be executed on the sub side. It is desirable that the player can be notified of the stop symbol of the main game symbol that is a big hit (the stop symbol is notified only when the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit). In the case of No in step 1302, step 1304, step 1310, or step 1312, the process proceeds to step 1322.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the main game content determination random number (the first main game content determination random number or the second main game content determination random number) is acquired (or when the suspension occurs), the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group Is configured to determine.

  In addition, it may be configured to transmit the main game content determination random number information, the failure random number delimiter information, the variation mode random number delimiter information, and the variation mode group information to the sub side at the timing when the hold occurs, The information to be transmitted to is not limited to this, but information related to the main game symbols that are stopped, information related to the main game symbols that are jackpots (number of special game rounds related to the main game symbols scheduled to stop, etc.) ), The number of holdings immediately after the winning of the holding (the number of holdings on the winning side of the first main game side or the second main game side may be only the holding number of both the first main game side and the second main game side) May be configured to transmit information related to the {the failure random number delimiter information refers to each gaming state and random number value (or random value range) on the first main game side (second main game side) And the lottery results are grouped together. This is one piece of random number delimiter information. For example, if the game is in a probability variation game state or a non-probability variation game state, it will be lost, whether it is a probability variation game state or a non-stochastic variation game state, If it is a floating game state, it is a win, but if it is a non-stochastic variable game state, a grouping such as losing can be given}.

  Next, in step 1322, the second main game start entrance entering determination means MJ11-B enters the second main game start entrance entrance from the second main game start entrance entrance detection device B11s of the second main game start entrance B10. It is determined whether or not information has been received. In the case of Yes in step 1322, in step 1324, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B, and the main game (especially the second main game) It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls related to the “side” is not the upper limit (for example, four). In the case of Yes in step 1324, in step 1326, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B acquires the second main game content determination random number. In the present embodiment, as the second main game content determination random number, three random numbers of the success / failure lottery random number, the symbol lottery random number, and the variation mode lottery random number are acquired as in the first main game content determination means. Incidentally, the acquisition range of each random number of the first main game content determination random number and the acquisition range of each random number of the second main game content determination random number (for example, the first lottery random number for the first main game and the right lottery random number for the second main game) Are set to the same range. Next, in Step 1328, the second main game symbol holding means MJ32-B temporarily stores (holds) the acquired second main game content determination random number in the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B. . Next, in step 1330, the hold control unit MJ30 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage unit MB20b and the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage unit MP40b, and executes the special game execution flag or the small hit execution flag. It is determined whether or not is on. In the case of Yes in step 1330, in step 1334, the hold control means MJ30 pre-determines the result of the stored hold and the stop symbol based on the hold information (the random determination random number and the symbol determination random number). Next, in step 1336, the hold control unit MJ30 sets the newly generated hold result and stop command information in the command transmission buffer MT10 for sending to the sub-main control unit SM (step (Send to the sub main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process of 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1338.

  In the case of No in step 1330, in step 1332, the hold control unit MJ30 determines whether or not the main game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage unit MB30b is off. If Yes in step 1332, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1400). On the other hand, if No in step 1332, the process proceeds to step 1334.

  Next, in step 1338, the hold control means MJ30 determines, based on the hold information (variation mode determining random number), the stored change mode random number delimiter information and the change mode group (the non-short-time change mode group and the time-change mode). (Group) is preliminarily determined (refer to the main game table 3 and the limited frequency table in FIGS. 14 to 17 for the variation mode random number delimiter information and the variation mode group). Next, in step 1340, the hold control means MJ30 sends a command related to a new hold occurrence (such as a hold occurrence command of the second main game content determination random number, a command related to the variation mode random number separator information) to the sub-main control unit SM. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999, and the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1400). Also in the case of No in step 1322 or step 1324, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1400).

  In step 1308 and step 1328, storage of the first main game content determination random number and storage of the second main game content determination random number are executed, but the main game content determination random number is stored in the RAM storage area of the main control board. Is stored, and only the information related to the “main game content determination random number” is stored in the byte storing the information related to the main game content determination random number (various timers). It is preferable to configure such that other information such as value is not stored) (when operating another data stored in the same 1 byte, information related to the main game content determination random number is rewritten due to noise or the like) To prevent it). In addition, with respect to the winning lottery random number, the change of the gaming state (from the gaming state related to the hold that has already been recorded) between the acquisition of the winning lottery random number and the execution of the winning lottery related to the winning lottery random number. Since not only the change but also the game state may change due to the newly generated hold, the game state at the time of the lottery execution related to the lottery random number may be unpredictable). Until the process is executed, the lottery random number is stored. In the present embodiment, the command to the sub-main control unit SM related to the hold information can be transmitted only at the time of the hold occurrence related to the first main game in the non-time-saving game state, while in the time-saving game state. Is configured so that it can be transmitted only at the time of the occurrence of the hold related to the second main game, but regardless of whether the hold is related to the first main game or the hold related to the second main game in any game state The command may be transmitted, and in such a case, the sub-main control unit SM may determine whether to use the received command. The specific example of the command relating to the result information to be transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is “D000H: out of order, D001H: out of low probability, hit out with high accuracy, D002H: hit out with both low accuracy and high accuracy, D003H Is a small hit, and a specific example of the command related to the stop symbol information transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM is “D100H: 16R probability variation, D101H: 16R non-accuracy variation, D102H: 2R probability variation”, A specific example of the command related to the variation mode random number delimiter information to be transmitted to the main control unit SM is “D200H: delimiter 1 (group 1 for time-reduced gaming state, group 1 for non-time-reduced gaming state, group 1 for limited frequency state)” , D201H: Break 2 (Group 1 for time-reduced gaming state, Group 2 for non-time-reduced gaming state, Group 1 for limited frequency state -Loop 1), D202H: has separated 3 (time saving game state if Group 2, Group 2 for non-time reduction gaming state, group 1 if limited frequency state).

  Next, FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of step 1400 in FIG. First, in step 1401, the hold digest control means MJ31 refers to the second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B and confirms whether there is no hold of the second main game symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1401, in step 1400 (1), the game content determination means MN executes a first main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1500). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1401, in step 1400 (2), the game content determination means MN executes a second main game symbol display process described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when there is a holding ball of the second main game symbol, regardless of the presence of the holding ball of the first main game symbol (even if the winning order is the holding of the first main game symbol) However, this is not limited to this, but it is not limited to this (the pending digest based on the winning order and both main game symbols are simultaneously executed in parallel). It may be configured to execute a parallel lottery for lottery.

  Next, FIG. 10 is a flowchart of the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol display process) according to the subroutine of step 1400 (1) {step 1400 (2)} in FIG. In addition, since this process is substantially the same process on the first main game symbol side and the second main game symbol side, the first main game symbol side will be mainly described, and the processing on the second main game symbol side will be described. Use parentheses. First, in step 1403, the pending digest control means MJ31 determines whether or not a change start condition is satisfied. Here, the change start condition is not during special game (or while the condition device is operating), is not changing the main game symbol, is holding the main game symbol, and is not in the small hit game Is a condition. Although not shown in this example, in the case of providing a variable fixed time (time for displaying the fixed display symbol after the main game symbol is displayed), during the variable fixed time, You may comprise so that it may not satisfy | fill.

  In the case of Yes in step 1403, in steps 1405 and 1406, the hold digest control means MJ31 stores the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-B). The first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) related to the current symbol variation that is temporarily stored is read and the first main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32b-A (second main game) The information is deleted from the symbol holding information temporary storage means MJ32b-B) and the remaining information temporarily stored is shifted (holding digestion process). Next, at step 1408, the winning / not determining lottery means MN10 refers to the first main game winning / not determining lottery table MN11ta-A (second main gaming notifying lottery table MN11ta-B) corresponding to each gaming state, and the first main Based on the game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the winning lottery random number), the main game symbol winning lottery is executed.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 1) is an example of the first main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-A (second main game success / failure lottery table MN11ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the jackpot winning probability in the probability varying gaming state is configured to be higher than the jackpot winning probability in the non-stochastic varying gaming state. Note that the winning probability is merely an example, and is not limited to this. Further, in the present embodiment, a hit (so-called small hit) in which the game state cannot be changed is illustrated, but a small hit may not occur (winning for the small hit) may be configured. Further, in the present embodiment, there are a plurality of losing symbols on the first main game side (in this example, two types of “HA” and “HB”), while a single losing symbol on the second main game side ( In this example, “HC”) is present. The number of lost symbols on the first main game (second main game) side is merely an example, and is not limited to this (for example, the number of lost symbols on the first main game side is three or more. The losing symbol on the first main game side may be singular and the losing symbol on the second main game side may be plural, or the losing symbol may be plural on both the first main game side and the second main game side. ). In this example, the loss pattern on the first main game side is configured such that the ratio of “HA” is higher than the ratio of “HB”, but is not limited to this (for example, “HB” The ratio may be configured to be higher than the ratio of “HA”, or these may be set to an equivalent ratio).

  Next, in step 1410, the first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) determines the first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination). Referring to the lottery table MN41ta-B), the stop symbol related to the main game symbol based on the main game symbol determination result lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) (particularly, the symbol lottery random number) Are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C.

  Here, FIG. 13 (main game table 2) is an example of a first main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-A (second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41ta-B). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, when a big hit is won, a plurality of main game symbol candidates (in this example, “3A, 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A” and “3B, 4B, 5B, 7B "), one main game symbol is determined as a jackpot symbol. In addition, the number of special games rounds determined by referring to the main game symbol and the opening time of the big prize opening are 3A, 3B and 4B for 2R short opening big hits (compared to the long opening big hit for the big winning opening time) 4A, 5A, 9A and 5B are 4R long open big hits (big hits where the opening time of the big prize opening is longer than short open big hits), 7A and 7B Is a 16R long open big hit (a big hit where the opening time of the big prize opening is longer than the short open big hit). Note that the types of random numbers and stop symbols are merely examples, and are not limited to this. {For example, in this embodiment, there are two types of lost symbols on the first main game side (“HA” and “HB”). 2 types), one type (one type of “HC”) is provided on the second main game side, but is not limited to this, both on the first main game side and the second main game side, A plurality of types of losing symbols may be provided, or any one of the losing symbols on the first main game side and the second main game side may be configured.

  Next, in step 1412, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and the limited frequency It is determined whether or not the A flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1412, in step 1450, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) performs a limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later, Control goes to step 1418. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1412, in step 1414, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) determines the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. , It is determined whether or not the limited frequency B flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1414, in step 1500, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) performs a limited frequency B variation mode determination process described later, Control goes to step 1418. In the case of No in step 1414, in step 1416, the first main game variation mode determination unit MN51-A (second main game variation mode determination unit MN51-B) determines the first main game variation corresponding to each game state. With reference to the mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B), the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number) Based on (particularly, the variation mode lottery random number), the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, these are temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the process proceeds to Step 1418.

  Here, the main game table 3 shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of a first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B) (note that In this figure, not only the main game table 3 but also the limited frequency table is shown at the same time, which will be described later). As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the main game symbol variation mode (variation time) for a certain random value can be determined based on the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result and the main game short flag state. Has been. For example, for a certain random number value, when the main game symbol winning / losing lottery result is win, it is easy to determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long, and when the main game short-time flag is on (time-short game) The state) is configured to easily determine a variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short. This example is merely an example, and is not limited to the type of variation mode (variation time), the selection rate, or the like. Further, the symbol variation time on the first main game side in the time-reduced game state (when the main game short-time flag is on) may be configured to be relatively long {the symbol variation on the second main game side Is configured to be advantageous for the player, it is easy for the second main game side to be suspended by reducing the symbol variation efficiency on the first main game side (advantageous for the player). It is particularly effective when the starting port on the first main game side and the starting port on the second main game side cannot be distinguished in order to establish the situation.

  In addition, as shown in this figure (particularly, FIG. 15), in this example, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, the result of lottery determination is lost and determined in the non-time-reduced gaming state (in the case of pending digestion). When the symbol to be stopped is “HA”, it is easy to select a variation mode that has a short time (in this example, a variation time of 15 seconds or less) (that is, an effect with a relatively low expectation of big hit is selected). (Easy). On the other hand, in this example, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, if the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, it is more relative than when the determined symbol is “HA”. Therefore, it is easy to select a variation mode having a long time (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot), and the variation time to be selected is The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, compared to the case where the determined symbol is “HA” A predetermined variation mode that becomes a long time (for example, a variation mode that becomes 120 seconds) is easily selected. In addition, you may comprise so that it may have two or more types of stop symbols related to the loss on the second main game side, and in such a case, the above-described configuration (configuration related to “HA” and “HB”) is the second main game. You may apply to the stop symbol which concerns on the game side lose.

  Next, in step 1418, the game content determination means MN sends the symbol variation display start instruction command (stop symbol information, stop symbol attribute information) temporarily stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The information related to the determined main game symbol such as the variation mode information and the command related to the current gaming state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (control command transmission in step 1999) (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM side by processing). Next, in step 1420, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets a predetermined time related to the main game symbol variation time in the first and second main game symbol variation management timer MP11t-C. To do. Next, at step 1422, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g (first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20)). On the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the main game symbol variation display is started in accordance with the variation mode stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. Next, in step 1424, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns on the changing flag in the flag area of the first / second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C, Control goes to step 1428.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1403, in step 1426, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C and changes. It is determined whether or not the middle flag is on. If Yes in step 1426, the process proceeds to step 1428. If No in step 1426, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1428, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines whether or not a predetermined time relating to the variation time of the main game symbol has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 1428, in step 1430, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sends information indicating that symbol variation has ended (the symbol confirmation display instruction command) to the sub main control unit SM side. It is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Next, in step 1432, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C causes the first main game symbol display unit A21g of the first main game symbol display device A20 (second main game symbol display device B20) ( The change display of the main game symbol on the second main game symbol display part B21g) is stopped, and the stop symbols stored in the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C are displayed as the fixed stop symbols. Control. Next, in step 1434, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C turns off the changing flag in the flag area of the first and second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C. .

  Next, in step 1436, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and determines whether or not the stop symbol of the main game symbol is a big hit symbol. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1436, in step 1438, the game content determination means MN turns on the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1550. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1436, in step 1440, the game content determination means MN refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the main game symbol is small. It is determined whether or not it is a winning symbol. In the case of Yes in step 1440, in step 1442, the game content determination means MN turns on the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and proceeds to step 1550. In the case of No in step 1440, the process proceeds to step 1550.

  Next, at step 1550, the specific game control means MP50 executes a specific game end determination process, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1600). Even in the case of No in step 1428, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 11 is a flowchart of the limited frequency A variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1450 in FIG. 10 (in this embodiment, the limited frequency A is the second main game start as described above. The frequency is limited with the fact that the mouth electric accessory B11d is in a state of being easily opened). First, in step 1452, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value is a continuation enable / disable value (the state in which the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easy to open = time shortening game). In this example, it is determined whether or not the value is 41 and 1). In the case of Yes in step 1452, in step 1454, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-1), and uses the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. Based on this, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1458. Here, the continuation permission / prohibition value is a counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c at which the time-reduced gaming state can be ended. The count value of the limited frequency counter AMN 52c becomes a continuation allowance value before the start of the 20th and 60th fluctuations from the end of the special game.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-1). As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table is set when the limited frequency counter A flag is on and the limited frequency counter value is a continuation allowance value (41 or 1 in this example). Reference is made to A-1.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1452, in step 1456, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-2), and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery. As a result, based on the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol, a variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 1458.

  Here, the tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 are examples of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (particularly, the limited frequency table A-2). As shown in this example, in this embodiment, the limited frequency counter A flag is on and the limited frequency counter value is other than the continuation allowance value (41 or 1 in this example). Reference is made to Table A-2.

  Next, at step 1458, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Next, at step 1460, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1460, in step 1462, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and performs the next processing (in step 1418). Process). In the case of No in step 1460, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 12 is a flowchart of the limited frequency B variation mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 1500 in FIG. 10 (the limited frequency B is the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d as described above. Is a limited frequency that is difficult to open). First, in step 1502, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table B), and uses the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, and the stop symbol related to the main game symbol. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined. Next, at step 1504, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2. Next, in step 1506, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1506, in step 1508, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and performs the next processing (in step 1418). Process). In the case of No in step 1506, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1418).

  Here, the limited frequency table B shown in FIGS. 14 to 17 is an example of the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta. As shown in this example, in the present embodiment, the limited frequency table B is referred to when the limited frequency B flag is on.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17, the variation mode random number separation information and the variation mode determination lottery table according to the present embodiment will be described in detail. As shown in the figure, the present embodiment is configured such that the variation mode random number separation information is determined for a certain random number value (or random value range). The variation mode random number delimiter information is provided in each table when the first main game side is hit (when lost) and when the second main game side is hit (when lost). More specifically, when the second main game side loses, it is divided into two divisions of division 1 to division 2 (the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest is division 1, the main game The variation mode in which the variation time of the symbol can be the longest is division 2), and it is divided into three divisions at the time of the first main game side hit and the second main game side hit (the main game symbol of The variation mode in which the variation time can be the shortest is demarcation 1, and the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the longest is delimitation 3). (The variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol can be the shortest is demarcation 1, and the variation mode in which the variation time of the main game symbol is the longest is delimiter 4) .

  In addition, the main game short time flag is turned on / off, and whether the table to be referred to is a normal (non-limited frequency) variation mode determination table or a limited frequency table {a limited frequency flag (a limited frequency A flag or ON / OFF of the (limited frequency B flag) (further, regarding the limited frequency A flag, whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter A is a predetermined value)} The range is different (for example, the range of the random number value is different even in the same group 1), and the fluctuation mode random number separator information is transmitted to the sub-side, so that the fluctuation according to these gaming states The aspect group is configured to be derivable on the sub side. That is, when the gaming state transitions between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the hold, the variation mode group that was planned at the time of the occurrence of the hold and the change mode group that is executed at the time of the hold can be different. (For example, the change mode group was scheduled to be group 1 because it was a non-time-reduced gaming state at the time of the onset of hold, but the actual change mode group became group 2 because the time-reduced game state was reached at the time of the suspension The fluctuation mode random number delimiter information to which a common variation mode group is assigned over all the gaming states is obtained at the time when the variable mode random number delimiter information is received on the sub-side (the subsequent gaming state) It is possible to normally execute the so-called hold prefetch effect without considering the transition. Note that “common” in FIGS. 14 to 17 in the present embodiment means that the table content has a common variation time, variation mode, etc., but (1) the variation mode is different and the variation time value. Are the same, (2) the same performance mode is performed, (3) the same performance mode regardless of the gaming state (for example, regardless of the gaming state such as the probability variation gaming state or the non-probability variation gaming state) Although the processing (assignment of variation pattern number, etc.) on the main control board M is different, the production mode may be “common” that is substantially the same. Moreover, you may comprise so that the candidate of the variation aspect which can be selected and / or the number of candidates may differ with a stop symbol (decision symbol). Further, the variation mode random number separator information of FIGS. 14 to 17 depends on whether the variation is on the first main game side or the second main game side, and whether or not the lottery result is win or miss. Although it was configured to form different variation mode random number separation information, it is not limited to this, whether it is a variation on the first main game side or a variation on the second main game side, and whether or not the lottery result is a win It may be configured to form one variation mode random number delimiter information including a loss.

  Moreover, as shown in this figure, in this example, it is comprised so that variation time may differ according to the number of pending | holding. For example, regarding the first main game symbol variation in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the result of the lottery is lost and the loss symbol is “HA”, the variation mode determination table content referred to according to the number of holds on the first main game side (The contents of the variation mode determination table referred to when the number of holds is 0 to 1 and when the number of holds is 2 to 3 are changed). In other words, when the winning symbol is “HA” when the lottery result is lost, the variation time (and the production mode) may be different depending on the number of holdings at the start of the fluctuation. ) Can be indeterminate}, but if the winning symbol is “HB” when the result of the lottery is lost, the variation time (and the production mode) regardless of the number of holdings at the time of holding ) Can be determined. Note that this example is merely an example, and the number of reservations used as a reference for switching the contents of the change mode determination table can be changed as appropriate (for example, three divisions of 0, 1 to 2, 3 or 0) -It may be divided into four pieces of 1 piece, 2 pieces, 3 pieces, etc.). In addition, in the case where the result of the lottery is lost, both the case where the determined symbol is “HA” and the case where it is “HB” are configured such that the variation time can be different depending on the number of holdings at the start of the variation. May be. As a configuration example in such a configuration, (1) the difference between the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 0 to 1 and the average value of the fluctuation time when the number of holdings is 2-3 Configuration in which “HB” is smaller than “HA” in the case where the decision symbol is “HA” (2) In the case where the decision symbol is “HB” than in the case where the decision symbol is “HA” It is good also as a structure with a high probability (a random number range is wide) that a fluctuation | variation aspect (fluctuation time) is determined without being dependent.

  Here, in this example, with respect to the symbol variation on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state, if the result of lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, the number of holds is 0 to 1. In this case, when the random number is “0 to 799”, the group 1 is obtained. When the random number is “800 to 1023”, the group 2 is obtained. Is “0 to 899”, the group is 1, and when the random number is “900 to 1023”, the group is 2. Therefore, when the random number value is “0 to 799”, the variation mode group is determined as group 1, and when the random number value is “900 to 1023”, the variation mode group is determined as group 2. Is “800 to 899”, it is unclear whether the variation mode group will be group 1 or group 2 until the suspension of digestion. In other words, when the determination pattern when the result of the lottery is lost is “HA”, a random number value (or a random value range) in which the variation mode group can be uniquely determined (in this example, “0 to 0”). 799 ”or“ 900-1023 ”) and a random value (or random value range) in which the variation mode group is not easily determined (in this example, a random value of“ 800 to 899 ”). Therefore, when performing a pre-reading effect for a hold whose decision symbol is “HA” when the winning / losing lottery result is lost, to which change mode group the change actually belongs at the time of hold reservation It may be necessary to determine the number of holds to determine In addition, it is preferable that the prefetch lottery is executed when the newly generated pending variation mode group is a random value (or a random value range) that can be uniquely determined. (For example, when the random number related to a certain hold is “900 to 1023”, any number of the remaining holds at the time of digestion of the given hold. However, since it is “group 2”, if the reach effect is configured to be executed in the variation mode group of “group 2”, when the certain hold occurs, the decision regarding the certain hold is made. Even if the symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, it is possible to execute the hold prefetch effect = the reach effect will eventually occur. Only does not occur inconsistency be executed pending read-ahead performance of).

  In this example, the variation time included in each group is within the same range of variation time (for example, group 1 has a variation time of 15 seconds or less regardless of whether or not it is in a time-saving gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variation time that can be selected is completely different (for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation time of 10 to 120 seconds is selected and the time In a shortened gaming state, a variation time of 1 to 5 seconds and 10 seconds is selected). In this case, a variation state group is not separated by an absolute variation time that does not depend on the gaming state. The variation mode group is divided according to the relative variation time in the middle (for example, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation with a variation time of 10 to 15 seconds is changed in the group 1, and the time-reduced gaming state is varied. Time Group 1 variation of 1.5 seconds, and isolate) as may be configured. Moreover, it is not limited to dividing a group according to a change time, for example, group information (for example, one of a plurality of reach effects in which character A appears is executed) Is a range information obtained by dividing a variation that executes any one of the plurality of reach effects where character B appears as a group B, that is, a big hit when the reach effect is executed. Information linked to the degree of expectation) may be transmitted to the sub-side.

  According to the configuration of this example, in a certain hold that is a pre-reading production target, when the gaming state can be different between the timing at which the certain hold occurs and the timing at which the certain hold is consumed (for example, the certain hold) It is possible to execute an appropriate pre-reading effect in consideration of a case where the gaming state shifts (such as when the hold digested earlier is a big hit). More specifically, regarding a certain hold that occurred in the probability variation gaming state, when the non-probability variation gaming state occurs at the timing of the certain hold, the variation mode group included in the variation mode random number separator information regarding the certain hold is , All belong to a group with a high expectation value (even if the game state changes, the target hold expectation degree can be maintained), or the same variation mode in the probability variation gaming state and the non-probability variation gaming state When it becomes a group, it is possible to execute a pre-reading effect relating to the certain hold, and a group having a low expected value when a non-probability variation gaming state is referred to as a variation mode group included in the variation mode random number separator information related to the certain hold (There is a possibility that the expectation of the target hold will be lowered by changing the gaming state), or non-probability variation gaming state If the different fluctuation mode group and a rate change gaming state, and infeasible prefetching effect related to the certain pending, it can be an equal.

  In addition, as examples in which the game state transitions in this way and the planned variation mode group and the variation mode group that is actually executed may differ, (1) there are a plurality of holds in the main game hold In a situation where a certain hold in the main game hold is digested and becomes a big hit (or small hit), the game state changes after the special game related to the hold (or after the bonus game related to the small hit) ( For example, transition from a non-stochastic variation gaming state to a probability variation gaming state), and the variation mode group of the suspension in the main game suspension remaining at the time of digestion of the certain suspension, (2) end of the special game After that (or after the end of the small hit), the game state transitions when the main game symbol has been changed a predetermined number of times (for example, the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game, the main game symbol 50 times after the end of the special game It is configured to be able to transition to a non-time-reduced gaming state at the time of movement, etc., and the holding that occurred before the end of the change of the main game symbol of the predetermined number of times after the special game ends (or after the small hit end), An example in which the variation mode group may be different when digested after the completion of the predetermined number of main game symbols after the end of the special game, (3) When the game state is a probability variation game state, By configuring a lottery (so-called falling lottery) that shifts to a non-stochastic variation gaming state for each change, trigger hold occurs in the probability variation gaming state, and by winning the falling lottery before digesting the trigger hold An example in which the variation mode group may be different is given.

  In the present embodiment, for example, the same variation mode group (for example, the group 1 when the main game short time flag is on and the group when the main game short time flag is off are turned on and off by the main game short time flag. 1), the random number ranges included in the same variation mode group may be different, and the variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the second main random number division information including only the different random number ranges). There are a plurality of hitting breaks 1) in the game variation mode determination lottery table. Also, variation mode random number delimiter information (for example, the second main mode) consisting only of the range of random numbers included in both cases where the main game short time flag within the range of random numbers of the same variation mode group is on or off. There is also a break 3) for hitting the game variation mode determination lottery table. Note that the number of types of variation mode random number delimiter information in each table (for example, four of delimiter 1 to delimiter 4 at the time of losing the first main game variation mode determination lottery table) is the number of types of variation mode groups (For example, three groups 1 to 3 at the time of losing the first main game variation mode determination lottery table).

  Further, in the present embodiment, group 3 (group C) of the variation mode groups can be selected as a variation mode group only when it is scheduled to have a variation time of a predetermined time or more (in this example, 60 seconds or more). It is configured as follows. Therefore, when the group 3 (group C) of the variation mode group is selected, the variation time becomes relatively long {in other words, the expectation of being a big hit becomes high (the variation mode that can be selected). The ratio of the inner jackpot will be high)}. Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the group 3 may be configured to be more easily selected (in the range of random numbers) in the non-time-reduced game state than in the time-reduced game state. In the gaming state (especially in the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state), it is possible to easily select a variation with a short variation time, thereby reducing the time required for the next big hit, Can reduce stress. Further, in the time-saving gaming state, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d is easy to open, it is easy to enter the second main game start opening B10, and a situation where there is no holding is unlikely to occur} . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be configured that the group 3 is more easily selected when the time is in the time-reduced gaming state than in the non-time-reduced gaming state. In the shortened game state), the game state is more advantageous to the player than in the non-time-reduced game state, and therefore it is effective to use the highly expected performance to raise the player's expectation}. Moreover, the policy regarding grouping of the variation mode groups may be changed as appropriate. The number of groups and the number and types of variation modes (variation times) belonging to each group are not limited to the above examples. Absent. For example, in this example, those belonging to group 3 (group C) are “scheduled to have a fluctuation time of a predetermined time or longer”, but in addition to this, “the fluctuation time that is the longest time that can be selected” It may be “scheduled to be”, “an average value of variation modes (variation times) belonging to the group is a predetermined time or more”, or “a big hit is determined”. In addition, a variation mode is associated with an effect mode (for example, a loss effect, a normal reach effect, a super reach effect 1, a super reach effect 2, a jackpot confirmed super reach effect, etc.) executed by the sub-main control unit SM. You may comprise so that a group may be separated (a variation aspect group corresponding to a loss effect, a variation aspect group corresponding to a normal reach effect,..., A big hit fixed super reach effect corresponding variation aspect group).

  In the present embodiment, the random time that the variation time group and the variation mode group have depends on whether the main game short time flag is on or off, and whether the table to be referenced is a normal variation mode determination table or a limited frequency table. The range of random numbers of the variation time and / or variation mode group varies depending on whether the gaming state is a non-stochastic variation gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, etc. You may comprise so that it may obtain.

  In this example, in the second main game variation mode determination table, a specific variation mode that can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a jackpot symbol in the non-probability variation state and the non-time-reduced game state. (In this example, it is configured to have a variation mode in which the variation time is 40 seconds). With this configuration, when a specific effect is selected, the player can also recognize that the second main game symbol is a jackpot symbol, so whether or not the specific effect is executed. It is possible to improve the fun of the game by making the production diverse, such as performing the production. This example is merely an example. For example, in the non-probability variation state and the non-time-reduced game state, the reach effect can be selected only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol, while the second main game is selected. When the symbol is a lost symbol, only the non-reach effect may be executed. Similarly, in another gaming state (probability variation state and non-time shortened gaming state or limited frequency state), a specific reach effect (or reach effect) is also given only when the second main game symbol is a big hit symbol. It may be configured to be selected.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 15, in the variation mode on the first main game side, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, it is referred to in the non-time-reduced gaming state. Contents of the first main game variation mode determination lottery table and the limited frequency table B that is referenced when the limited frequency B flag is on (in this example, for example, when winning a small hit) (For example, the variation time and variation mode group corresponding to the random value) are the same. That is, in this embodiment, even if the variation pattern table is changed on the first main game side, if it is a non-time-reduced gaming state, it is a lost symbol (in this example, “HA” The same table structure may be used for “HB” (the change time corresponding to the random number value, the change mode group, whether or not the change mode depends on the number of holds, etc.) so that they can be the same. It is configured. Note that this example is merely an example, and it is possible to have a configuration in which the contents of the table related to the lost symbol can be changed (or can be the same) depending on whether or not the game is in the probability variation gaming state, or the second main game side You may provide the same structure in a fluctuation | variation aspect.

  Further, in this example, even if the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbols are the same (“HA” or “HB”), different variation modes can be selected depending on the gaming state. ing. For example, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side, when the result of lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, the variation time is 30 seconds in the non-time-reduced gaming state. While it is configured so that only the effects described above are selected, if the game is in the time-reduced gaming state, an effect whose variation time is 5 seconds can be selected (specifically, the non-time-reduced gaming state) In this case, it is configured such that an effect with a short variation time is easily selected as compared to the case of the time-saving gaming state. Further, in the variation mode determination table on the first main game side where the winning / failing lottery result is a loss and the determined symbol is “HA”, when the game is in the time-reduced game state, the game is in the non-time-reduced game state Compared to the above, it is configured such that the variation mode having a short variation time (5 seconds in this example) is relatively easily selected. This example is an example, and even when the gaming state is different, the same variation mode (more specifically, for example, the variation time) is selected when the determined symbols are the same. May be. Further, in the present embodiment, when the determined symbol is “HA”, the variation mode (variation time) may be different depending on the number of holds when the game is in the non-time-reduced gaming state {variation mode (variation time) May depend on the number of holds} On the other hand, when the game is in a time-saving gaming state, the variation mode (variation time) is not different depending on the number of holds. Further, when the determined symbol is “HB”, the variation mode (variation time) does not differ depending on the number of holds regardless of the gaming state.

  Note that this example is merely an example. When the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the non-probability variation gaming state and non- The selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is long (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more) may be different depending on the time-reduced game state {more specifically, the probability variation game In the state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, it may be configured to increase or decrease the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively long (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more). Good}. Similarly, when the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HA”, the game is in the probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state, and the non-probability-variable gaming state and the non-time-reduced gaming state. And the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) may be different {more specifically, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state In this case, the selection ratio of the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short (in this example, the variation time is 20 seconds or more) may be increased or decreased}.

  Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when the result of lottery is lost, the determined symbol is “HA”, and the game is in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation time on the first main game side is the variation time. Are configured to have different groups depending on the number of holdings at the start of fluctuation. On the other hand, even if the determined symbol is “HA”, in the variation mode on the first main game side in the time-reduced gaming state, the variation time (and the production mode) regardless of the number of suspensions at the time of suspension ) Can be determined. This example is merely an example. For example, when the result of the lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HA” (“HB”), the gaming state (whether it is a probability variation state and / or Regardless of whether or not the game is in a time-reduced gaming state), the variation time (and production mode) may differ depending on the number of holds at the beginning of the variation {or in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the first main game side decides When the symbol is “HB”, it may be configured so that it can be determined in one variation time (and production mode) regardless of the number of holdings at the time of holding.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the case of a hold where the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HA”, the selection tendency of the variation mode may be different depending on the number of the hold at the time of digestion of the hold related to the “HA”. The change mode random number delimiter information is configured so that the change mode group may or may not be different depending on the number of holds at the time of digestion of the hold related to the “HA”. In addition, in the case of a hold where the stop symbol is scheduled to be “HB”, it is reconstituted that the selection tendency of the variation mode is not different depending on the number of holds when the hold related to “HB” is digested. Let me supplement.

  Next, FIG. 18 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 in FIG. First, at step 1552, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1552, in step 1570, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time reduction counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1570, in step 1572, the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the time reduction counter MP52c. Next, in step 1574, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the time / count counter MP52c and determines whether or not the counter value (remaining time / count) is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1574, in step 1576 and step 1578, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. The process proceeds to (the process of step 1600). It should be noted that the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600) also in the case of No in step 1552, step 1570, or step 1574.

  Next, FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special game operation condition determination process according to the subroutine of step 1600 in FIG. First, in step 1602, the condition determination means MP31 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the condition device operation flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1602, in step 1604, the special game control means MP30, the special game flag (main game probability change flag, main game short time flag, auxiliary game short time) in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. Flag) off. Next, at step 1606, the specific game control means MP50 clears the value of the time reduction counter MP52c to zero. Next, in step 1608, the specific game control means MP50 clears the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c and the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2. Next, at step 1610, the specific game control means MP50 turns off the limited frequency A flag and the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1612, the special game control means MP30 turns on a special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1614, the special game control means MP30 turns off the condition device operation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1700). In the case of No in step 1602, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 20 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of step 1700 in FIG. First, in step 1702, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game transition permission flag is on. In the case of Yes in Step 1702, in Steps 1704 and 1706, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game transition permission flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and special game execution flag. Turn on. Next, in step 1707, the special game execution means MP33 sets an initial value (1 in this example) to a round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1708, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game start display instruction command) to start the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit side ( In step 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to step 1712.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1702, in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the special game execution flag is on. If YES in step 1710, the process proceeds to step 1712. In the case of No in step 1710, the special game execution means MP33 determines that the special game permission is not granted, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800).

  Next, in step 1712, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b to determine whether or not the round continuation flag is off, in other words, immediately before the start of each round. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1712, that is, immediately before the start of each round, first, in step 1714, the special game execution means MP33 opens the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b in an open pattern (for example, stop of the main game symbol). If the symbol is 3A, 3B or 4B, the opening pattern of “0.2 second open → 1.0 second closed → 0.2 second open → closed”, the main game stop symbol is 4A, 5A, 7A, 9A, In the case of 5B or 7B, an “open pattern of 29.0 seconds open → close” is set. Next, in step 1716, the special game executing means MP33 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c to zero. Next, in step 1718, the special game execution means MP33 turns on the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1720, the special game executing means MP33 drives the first big prize opening electric combination C11d (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d) of the first big prize opening C10 to make the first big prize. The mouth C10 (or the second grand prize opening C20) is opened, the special game timer MP34t (particularly, the opening time timer) is set to a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds), and the process proceeds to Step 1722. On the other hand, if No in step 1712, that is, if the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step 1722 without performing the processes in steps 1714 to 1720.

  Next, in step 1722, the special game execution means MP33 transmits a game state command (for example, the current round number, game ball winning number, etc.) related to the current special game to the sub-main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). Next, in step 1724, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) is assigned to the first big winning opening C10 (or the second big winning opening C20) in the round. ) Is determined whether or not there is a winning ball. If Yes in step 1724, the process proceeds to step 1728. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1724, in step 1726, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game timer MP34t (especially the open time timer) to determine the predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) relating to the special prize opening. It is determined whether or not it has elapsed. Also in the case of Yes in step 1726, the process proceeds to step 1728. If No in step 1726, the process proceeds to the next process (step 1800).

  Next, in step 1728, the special game executing means MP33 determines the first big prize opening electric combination C11d of the first big prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening electric combination C21d of the second big prize opening C20). The driving is stopped and the first grand prize opening C10 (or the second big prize opening C20) is closed. Next, in step 1730, the special game execution means MP33 resets a special game timer MP34t (particularly an open time timer). Next, in step 1732, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the round continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1733, the special game execution means MP33 adds 1 to the counter value of the round number counter (not shown) in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1734, the special game execution means MP33 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b and determines whether or not the final round has ended (for example, the round number counter in the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b). Whether or not the counter value (not shown) exceeds the maximum number of rounds). In the case of Yes in step 1734, in step 1736, the special game execution means MP33 turns off the special game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1738, the special game executing means MP33 sets information (special game end display instruction command) to end the special game in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM side. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process of step 1999). In step 1750, the specific game control means MP50 executes a game state determination process after the end of the special game, which will be described later, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1800). In the case of No in step 1734, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 1800).

  Next, FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the game state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 in FIG. First, in step 1752, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probable big hit symbol (after the execution of the special game is finished, the probability variation game state is reached). It is a big hit symbol to be transferred, and in this example, it is determined whether it is 3A, 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1752, in step 1754, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and proceeds to step 1756. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1752, that is, in the case where the stop symbol is a non-probable variation big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that does not shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game is finished, in this example, 4A / 4B) 1756.

  Next, in step 1756, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is a probable change / time and jackpot symbol (the probability change after the execution of the special game is completed). It is a jackpot symbol that shifts to a gaming state and a time-saving gaming state, and in this example, it is determined whether or not it is 5A, 7A, 9A, 3B, 5B, 7B). In the case of Yes in step 1756, in step 1758, the specific game control means MP50 refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol is the awakening stage probability change / short-time hit symbol (this example) Then, it is determined whether or not 5A · 3B). Note that the awakening stage probability change / short-time jackpot symbol is the awakening stage (a stage where the player can be informed of whether or not the player is in a probability-variable gaming state at the end of the stage) after the jackpot is over. It is a jackpot symbol that shifts to. In the case of Yes in step 1758, in step 1760, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) in the limited frequency counter AMN52. Next, in step 1762, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1764, the specific game control means MP50 sets the awakening stage transition command (a command related to information indicating the transition to the awakening stage) in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM. (Sent to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to step 1778. Note that if the result is No in step 1758, the process proceeds to step 1778.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1756 (that is, in this example, the stop symbol is any one of 3A, 4A, and 4B), in step 1766, the specific game control means MP50 determines the first and second main game symbols. Referring to the temporary information storage means MB11b-C, the stop symbol is a non-probable change / short time big hit symbol (a big hit symbol that shifts to a non-stochastic variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state after completion of execution of the special game. In this example, 4A -It is determined whether it is 4B). In the case of Yes in step 1766, in step 1768, the specific game control means MP50 sets the number of hours and hours based on the big hit symbol to the counter value of the hour and hour number counter MP52c (the time and number of times can be different depending on the type of big hit symbol). For example, when the stop symbol 4A is further subdivided into 4A-1 and 4B-1, it is 20 times in the case of 4A-1 or 4B-1, and in the case of 4A-2 or 4B-2. Is 60 times, etc.) Thus, in this example, in the big hit symbol belonging to the 4A symbol (4B symbol), 4A-1 (4B-1) having 20 time reductions and 4A-2 (60 time reductions) 4B-2) is included, but the type of jackpot symbol and the type of time reduction are not limited to this, and other types of time reduction (eg, time reduction 40 times) 4A- 3 (4B-3) may be further provided, and the number of time reductions in each of the exemplified jackpot symbols and 4A-1 and 4A-2 (4B-1 and 4B-2) in the 4A symbol (4B symbol) ) Ratio and the like can be changed as appropriate. Next, in step 1770, the specific game control means MP50 sets the same value (20 times or 60 times) as the number of time reductions set in the counter value of the time reduction number counter MP52c in the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Next, in step 1772, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, in step 1774, the specific game control means MP50 sets the command related to the awakening stage transition command and the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c to the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub main control unit SM (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM side by the control command transmission process in 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1778. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1766 {that is, when the stop symbol is a latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example)}, in step 1776, the specific game control means MP50 stores the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. With reference to the flag area, it is determined whether or not at least one of the main game probability change flag and the main game short time flag is on at the time of winning the big hit. If Yes in step 1776, the process proceeds to step 1778.

  Next, in step 1778 and step 1780, the specific game control means MP50 turns on the main game short time flag and the auxiliary game short time flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and performs the next processing (step 1800).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1776 {that is, when the main game probability change flag and the main game short time flag are off (normal game state)}, in step 1782, the specific game control means MP50 receives the devil stage transition command (devil stage) Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1800). After the special game related to the “3A” symbol won in the normal game state, the game shifts to the probability-variable game state and the non-time-reduced game state, and after the small hit game selected in the normal game state, the normal game state In any case, it is configured to execute substantially the same effects. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (small hit game) related to the “3A” symbol or the small hit symbol has been executed (so-called “latent state” is created), and the interest of the game is enhanced. It will be improved.

  Next, FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the small hit game control process according to the subroutine of step 1800 in FIG. First, in step 1802, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b and determines whether or not the small hit flag is on. If YES in step 1802, in step 1804, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1806, the small hit game control means MP40 stores an open pattern (in this example, the first big prize similar to the execution of the special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol in the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. The opening / closing pattern of the mouth C10, for example, 0.2 second open → 1.0 second closed → 0.2 second open → closed) is set. Next, at step 1808, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1810, the small hit game control means MP40 opens the first big winning opening C10 and starts a small hit game timer MP41t (the timer value is counted down). Next, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 is a special game start display instruction command (a command to the sub side, and in this example, the effect mode during the small hit game is a special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol. Since it is the same as the effect mode during the game, the command is the same as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (step (Send to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in 1999), and the process proceeds to Step 1812. In the present embodiment, in the non-stochastic game state and the non-time-reduced game state (normal game state), when the small hit or the latent probability change big hit is won, the first big winning opening C10 during the small hit game is opened. By making the mode and the production mode the same as during the special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol, and also making the stay stage executed after the end of the small hit game and the special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol the same, It becomes difficult for the player to determine whether the special game (or small hit game) related to the big hit symbol of the hit symbol or the latent probability change big hit symbol has been executed (so-called a latent state is created), improving the interest of the game It will be made to.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1802, in step 1811, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and determines whether or not the small hit execution flag is on. To do. If Yes in step 1811, the process proceeds to step 1812.

  Next, in step 1812, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the first big prize opening winning detection device C11s, and determines whether or not there is a win (ball) in the first big prize opening C10. In the case of Yes in step 1812, in step 1814, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and a predetermined number (for example, ten) of winning balls in the first big winning opening C10. It is determined whether or not there was. If Yes in step 1814, the process proceeds to step 1818. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1812 or step 1814, in step 1816, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game timer MP41t for a predetermined time (in this example, 0 for example) 2 seconds open → 1.0 seconds closed → 0.2 seconds open → 1.4 seconds related to closing) is determined. If YES in step 1816, the process proceeds to step 1818.

  Next, at step 1818, the small hit game control means MP40 stops the driving of the first big prize opening electric accessory C11d and closes the first big prize opening C10. Next, in step 1820, the small hit game control means MP40 stops and resets the small hit game timer MP41t. Next, at step 1822, the small hit game control means MP40 turns off the small hit execution flag in the flag area of the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b. Next, in step 1823, the small hit game control means MP40 is a special game end display instruction command (a command to the sub side. In this example, the effect mode during the small hit game is a special game related to the latent probability variable big hit symbol. Since it is the same as the effect mode during the game, the command is the same as in the case of the latent probability variation big hit symbol) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmitting to the sub-main control unit SM side (step In 1999, the control command is transmitted to the sub main control unit SM side), and the process proceeds to Step 1824.

  Next, in step 1824, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and whether or not the main game probability change flag and the main game short time flag are off (normal game state). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 1824, in step 1826, the small hit game control means MP40 turns on the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b. Next, at step 1828, the small hit game control means MP40 refers to the small hit game related information temporary storage means MP40b, and the main game symbol that is stopped is the short hit small hit symbol {in this example, 1K, It is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations to which the limited frequency table is referred after the end of the small hit game is smaller than the long count small hit symbol (2K)}. In the case of Yes in Step 1828, in Step 1830, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 to a short number (10 times), and proceeds to Step 1834. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1828, in Step 1832, the small hit game control means MP40 sets the limited number of times (30 times) in the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2, and proceeds to Step 1834. Next, in step 1834, the small hit game control means MP40 transmits a devil stage transition command and a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 (command to the sub side) to the sub main control unit SM side. Is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM in the control command transmission process in step 1999), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 1997). Note that if the answer is No in Step 1811, Step 1816, or Step 1824, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 1997). In this embodiment, the first prize winning opening C10 is set to be the first winning prize opening C10 during the small hit game execution. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The second winning prize opening C20 may be the second winning prize opening C20. In such a case, the winning prize opening opened during the execution of the special game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example) is also the second winning prize opening C20. It is preferable to do.

  Next, control processing executed on the sub-main control unit SM side will be described with reference to FIGS. First, FIG. 23 is a main flowchart on the sub-control board S side (particularly on the sub-main control unit SM side) in the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the process of FIG. 4D is a process on the sub-main control unit SM side that is executed after resetting, such as when the game machine is powered on. That is, at the time of powering on the gaming machine, in step 2002, the sub-main control unit SM executes an initial process based on the information received from the main side (main control board M side) (for example, RAM clear information is stored). If received, the sub-side RAM is initialized, various information commands are received, and the production-related information at the time of power interruption is reset in the sub-side RAM). Next, in step 2003, the sub-main control unit SM indicates that the trigger is on hold (the hold on winning the pre-read lottery at the time of winning) from the information relating to the hold temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. The information is deleted (if there is no hold with information indicating that the trigger is on hold, this processing is not executed and the processing proceeds to the next processing), and the hold display mode is all white. Display (reset the process related to the pre-reading effect). In addition, the process at the time of a power interruption is not limited to this, It is comprised so that pre-reading production can be continued without deleting the information indicating that the trigger is on hold or the information on the hold display mode even after the power interruption is restored. May be. In such a configuration, for example, a subsidence area is provided on the sub side where information can be maintained even during power interruption, and information related to performance is backed up in the retreat area when a power interruption occurs, and power interruption recovery is performed. It may be configured to restore backed up information from time to time. In addition, it may be configured so that information related to the content of the hold is received again from the main side at the time of power failure recovery, at the start of change, at the time of change stop, at the time of occurrence of hold (even for hold other than the newly generated hold) Good {Although not specifically shown in this example, at the time of power failure recovery, only information related to the number of holds is transmitted from the main side (information related to the contents of hold is not sent). . For this reason, since the information related to the hold that existed at the time of power interruption does not exist after the return from power interruption, the pre-reading effect cannot be executed for the hold (the hold from the main side at the time of power interruption return) It may be configured so as to receive information related to the above, and may be configured so that a pre-reading effect can be executed for the suspension. Note that if a power interruption occurs while the decorative symbol is changing, and if it does not have a function to maintain the information at the time of the interruption, it will remain dark until it receives the change end command from the main side. A screen (for example, a screen that displays “in preparation” or the like) will be displayed}. Thereafter, the process proceeds to a loop process for repeatedly executing (b) which is a repetitive process routine of the sub-main control unit SM. Here, when (b) is executed, as shown in the process of (b) of the figure, first, in step 2100, the secondary game control means (sub-main control unit) SM performs a hold information management process to be described later. Execute. Next, in step 2300, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display content determination process described later. Next, in step 2400, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a decorative symbol display control process described later. Next, in step 2500, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a special game related display control process which will be described later. Next, in step 2600, the sub game control means (sub main control unit) SM executes a stay stage determination process to be described later. Next, in step 2999, the sub game control means (sub-main control unit) SM executes display command transmission control processing (transmits commands set in a series of these subroutines to the sub-sub control unit SS side). The repetition processing routine is terminated.

  As described above, the sub-main control unit SM employs a form in which the sub-main routine (S2100 to S2999) is loop-processed after reset. Further, the process of FIG. 5C is an interrupt process of the sub main control unit SM, and the signal from the STB signal line on the main control board M described above is a terminal of the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (in this example). , NMI terminal) is a processing flow (c). That is, when an NMI interrupt occurs in the CPU of the sub main control unit SM (when the STB signal line is turned on), in step 2004, the sub main control unit SM receives the command input port (from the main control board M side). Check the data signal line input port). In step 2006, the sub main control unit SM sends the command transmitted from the main control board M side to the RAM (eg, main side information temporary storage means SM11b) on the sub main control unit SM side based on the confirmation result. Is temporarily stored, and the process that was being executed immediately before this interrupt process is restored.

  Next, FIG. 24 is a flowchart of the hold information management process according to the subroutine of step 2100 in FIG. First, in step 2102, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b, and from the main control board M side, a command (first main game symbol or second main game symbol) related to the new hold occurrence. It is determined whether or not (holding information relating to a game symbol) has been received. In the case of Yes in step 2102, in step 2104, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b (in this example, a maximum of four for the first main game, Add “1” to the maximum number of second main games. Next, in step 2106, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 temporarily sends the new hold result and the command related to the stop symbol information transmitted from the main control board M side to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Remember. Next, in step 2108, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information (particularly the change mode group, the change mode random number delimiter information, etc.) based on the hold occurrence command transmitted from the main control board M side. Temporary storage in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Note that if the main side does not transmit the information on the result of the determination, the stop symbol, the variation mode group, and the variation mode random number delimiter information, the information is stored in the hold information temporary storage area in step 2106 or step 2108. Will not be temporarily stored. Next, in step 2110, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines whether or not the new hold is a hold on the first main game side. In the case of Yes in step 2110, in step 2150, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a first main game winning prefetch determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2110, in step 2200, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 executes a second main game winning prefetch determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2112.

  Next, in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the new hold has information indicating that the hold is a trigger hold. To do. In the case of Yes in step 2112, the drawing hold information display control means SM 22 executes a prefetch hold content determination process, which will be described later, and moves to step 2122 in step 2250. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2112, the process proceeds to step 2122.

  On the other hand, if No in step 2102, has the drawing hold information display control means SM22 received the symbol variation display start instruction command from the main control board M side with reference to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b in step 2114? Determine whether or not. If Yes in step 2114, in step 2116, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 subtracts “1” from the drawing hold counter in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Next, in step 2118, the figure hold information display control means SM22 displays the hold information related to the symbol change (particularly, the result of the decision, the stop symbol information, the change mode group, and the change mode random number delimiter information). While deleting from the temporary storage means SM22b, the remaining hold information is shifted. Next, in step 2120, the drawing suspension information display control means SM22 turns on the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to step 2122. Note that if the result is No in step 2114, the process also proceeds to step 2122.

  Next, in step 2122, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 is displayed on the effect display device SG in the hold display mode determined using the effect display means SS (in particular, the first hold display portion SG12, the second hold). On the display unit SG13), the same number of hold display lamps as the drawing hold counter value in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b are lit and displayed, and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2300).

  Next, FIG. 25 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2150 in FIG. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2152, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and holds the second main game hold (first main hold within the hold). It is determined whether or not there is a hold that is digested in preference to the game side. In the case of Yes in step 2152, in step 2154, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current game state is not the time reduction game state. In the case of Yes in step 2154, in step 2158, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Judge whether or not there is. Here, the trigger hold is a hold that is won in a pre-read lottery at the time of winning (first pre-game lottery at the time of winning a first main game, pre-read lottery at the time of second main game win). In the case of Yes in step 2158, in step 2160, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether there is a big hit hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2160, the process proceeds to step 2162.

  Next, in the processing related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2162, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2162, in step 2164, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning pre-read lottery to win the new hold with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example), Control goes to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2162, in step 2166, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether the stop symbol related to the new hold is “HA”. Determine whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2166, in step 2168, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group 3. judge. As described above, in the present embodiment, when determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it is configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode group. Note that when determining whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed, it may be configured to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed in consideration of the variation mode random number separation information. In the case of Yes in step 2168, in step 2170, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning pre-read lottery to win the new hold with a predetermined probability (1/10 in this example), Control goes to step 2174. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2166 (that is, when the stop symbol related to the new hold is “HB”), in step 2172, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is predetermined for the new hold. A prefetch lottery for winning winning with a probability (in this example, 1/3) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2174. Thus, in the present embodiment, the prefetch lottery is more easily won when the stop symbol related to the first main game is “HB” than when it is “HA”.

  Next, in step 2174, the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2174, in step 2176, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is set to “trigger hold” for the new hold won in the winning pre-read lottery in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 2112 processing).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2152 (when the second main game hold is present in the hold), in step 2178, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Delete the information indicating "trigger hold" from the stored hold information (if there is no hold in the hold with information indicating that the trigger is held, this process is not executed and the next The process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). It should be noted that if the result of Step 2154, Step 2158, Step 2160, or Step 2174 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of Step 2112). In the process of step 2178, when there is a hold on the second main game side (occurrence), in the second main game side priority digestion gaming machine as in this embodiment, the newly generated second main game This is a configuration for avoiding a situation in which the pre-reading effect over a plurality of variations is not executed normally because the game-side suspension is consumed first, so that the planned variation order is not achieved. In addition, as a prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery, a condition that whether or not there is a hold of a specific variation mode group (or a hold of specific variation mode random number separator information) in the hold before the new hold is set as a prohibition condition Also good.

  Next, FIG. 26 is a flowchart of prefetch determination processing at the time of second main game winning according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. This process will be described in two parts: a process related to the prohibition condition of the pre-read lottery and a process related to the pre-read lottery. In the former prefetch lottery prohibition process, first, in step 2202, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the main information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether or not the current gaming state is a time-reduced gaming state. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2202, in step 2204, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and there is a hold having information indicating that the trigger is held in the hold. Judge whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 2204, in step 2206, the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not there is a big hit hold in the hold before the new hold. Determine whether. If Yes in step 2206, the process proceeds to step 2208.

  Next, in the processing related to the latter prefetch lottery, first, in step 2208, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold is a big hit hold. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2208, in step 2210, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prefetch lottery for winning winning with a predetermined probability (1/3 in this example) for the new hold, Control goes to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2208, in step 2212, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and whether or not the new hold variation mode group is group C. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2212, in step 2216, the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a prefetch lottery for winning winning with a predetermined probability (1/5 in this example) for the new hold, Control goes to step 2220. On the other hand, if No at step 2212, the process proceeds to step 2220.

  Next, in step 2220, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines whether or not the winning pre-read lottery is won. In the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2222, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k is set to “trigger hold” for the new hold in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b that wins the winning pre-read lottery. Information to that effect is added and temporarily stored, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (step 2112 processing). It should be noted that if the result of step 2202, step 2204, step 2206, or step 2220 is No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112).

  Next, FIG. 27 is a flowchart of prefetch hold content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2250 in FIG. First, in step 2252, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and determines whether or not the trigger hold is a big hit hold. In the case of Yes in step 2252, in step 2254, the drawing hold information display control means SM22 determines the display mode of the trigger hold by referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), and performs the next process (step 2122). The process proceeds to (1). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2252, in step 2256, the display mode of the trigger hold is determined with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2122).

  Here, the two tables at the bottom of the figure are a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a big hit) and a hold display mode determination table (at the time of a loss). In the present embodiment, the types of display modes that can be selected when determining the display mode of the trigger hold that can change during the execution of the hold change effect with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit) are rainbow and red , Green and blue, and there are three types of display modes that can be selected when determining with reference to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of losing), the hold display mode A lottery will be drawn using a random number dedicated to the decision. It should be noted that red is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (at the time of big hit), while blue is most easily selected when referring to the hold display mode determination table (when lost). The expectation of jackpot for each display mode when the event occurs is selected only when the rainbow color is a jackpot, and the colors other than the rainbow color are from the highest expectation to red, green, and blue. Yes. Note that the display mode that can be changed is merely an example, and there is no problem even if the number of types is changed or the color that can be changed is changed. In addition, in this example, it is configured so that the expected degree of big hit can be suggested by the display color of the hold, but is not limited to this, for example, in the case of big hit (or combined with the expected degree of big hit) The game state after the execution of the special game may be suggested. In such a configuration, particularly in the probability variation gaming state, the display color of the suspension suggests the expectation degree to shift to the probability variation gaming state after the execution of the special game in the case of a big hit in the suspension. (For example, if the hold display color is red, the probability variation expectation is large, if the blue display probability is blue, the probability variation expectation is small, etc.), it is determined whether the probability variation gaming state advantageous to the player continues or ends. It is possible to perform an effective production.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the hold change effect is executed, the big hit expectation can be different depending on the display mode selected from the plural types of hold display modes. Further, it may be configured such that the hold change effect can be executed a plurality of times during execution of the prefetch effect (from the timing of winning the prefetch lottery to the end of the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold). For example, in the case where the hold change effect is executed twice during the execution of the prefetch effect, when the display mode of the hold that changes in the first hold change effect is blue, the second time The on-hold display mode that changes in the on-hold change effect is changed to green or red, that is, every time the on-hold change effect is executed, it changes (ranks up) to a on-hold display mode with a high jackpot expectation. It is desirable to make it so that it does not detract from the player's expectations. In addition, the effect related to the change in the hold display is not limited to this, and as a result, an effect mode that does not involve the change in the hold display may be provided. There may be provided an effect form (so-called gas pattern) in which an effect occurs and the hold display does not change as it is, and an effect form in which the hold display change is executed thereafter.

  Next, FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of step 2300 in FIG. First, at step 2302, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination permission flag is on. If Yes in step 2302, in step 2304, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns off the symbol content determination permission flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2306, the design display content determination means SM21n (and the notice effect display content determination means SM24n, the reach effect display content determination means SM25n) are temporarily stored in the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Referring to the stop symbol / variation mode relating to the main game symbol) and the drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21ta, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol {for example, when the stop symbol relating to the main game symbol is a jackpot symbol If it is a flat eye such as “7, 7, 7” or a lost symbol, it will be “1, 3, 5”, etc.} and a variation mode {for example, the variation mode related to the main game symbol is short In the case of fluctuation, non-reach, in the case of long-term fluctuation, normal reach, super reach, etc.} are determined, and the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b (and the notice effect related) Distribution temporary storage unit SM24b, temporarily stored in the reach demonstration related information temporary storage means SM25b). Next, in step 2308, the drawing display content determination means SM21n turns on the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (step 2400 processing). Transition. In the case of No in step 2302, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2400).

  Next, FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display control process according to the subroutine of step 2400 in FIG. First, in step 2402, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b and determines whether or not the symbol content determination flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2402, in step 2404, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol content determination flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2406, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns on the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. Next, in step 2408, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 starts the drawing variation time management timer SM21t, and proceeds to step 2410. Note that if the result in Step 2402 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2410.

  Next, in step 2410, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and determines whether or not the symbol changing flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2410, in step 2412, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 confirms the timer value of the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2414, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines the decorative symbol change start timing based on the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the change mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether it has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2414, in step 2416, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol variable display command (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). The process proceeds to step 2426.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2414, in step 2418, the decoration symbol display control means SM21 decorates the decoration based on the drawing variation time management timer SM21t and the variation mode temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b. It is determined whether or not the symbol stop display timing (temporary stop display timing) has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2418, in step 2420, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (temporary stop display command) (the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999). To be sent).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2418, in step 2422, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and reach effect display control means SM25), the drawing change time management timer SM21t and the notice effect related information temporary storage means SM24b (and reach effect). Based on the fluctuation mode temporarily stored in the related information temporary storage means SM25b), it is determined whether the display timing of the preview image or the reach image has been reached. In the case of Yes in step 2422, in step 2424, the notice effect display control means SM24 (and the reach effect display control means SM25) set the image display command related to the notice image and the reach image (display command transmission control processing in step 2999). At step 2426, the process proceeds to step 2426. Note that if the result is No in step 2422, the process proceeds to step 2426.

  Next, in step 2426, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 determines whether or not the main game symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, referring to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, the main game board from the main control board M side). It is determined whether or not information indicating that the symbol is stopped and displayed has been received). In the case of Yes in step 2426, in step 2428, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and awakening stage flag (a flag that is turned on while staying in the awakening stage described later). Yes, which is turned on in step 2614), is determined. In the case of Yes in step 2428, in step 2430, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2432. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2428, the process proceeds to Step 2432. Next, in step 2432, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and is a devil stage flag (a flag that is turned on while staying in the devil stage described later, step 2634). It is determined whether or not is turned on. In the case of Yes in step 2432, in step 2434, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2436. Note that if the result in Step 2432 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2436.

  Next, in step 2436, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 sets a decorative symbol stop display command (confirmed display command) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). . Next, in step 2438, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 stops and resets (zero clears) the drawing variation time management timer SM21t. Next, in step 2440, the decorative symbol display control means SM21 turns off the symbol changing flag in the flag area of the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, and proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2500). To do. Note that if the answer is No in Step 2410 or Step 2426, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in Step 2500).

  Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. First, in step 2502, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the special gaming flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2502, in step 2504, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game start display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2504, in step 2506 and step 2508, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the special gaming flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the effect display device. A big hit start display is performed on the SG (appropriate display is performed based on the type of the big hit), and the process proceeds to step 2512. Note that if the result in Step 2502 is No, the process proceeds to Step 2512.

  Next, in step 2512, the background effect display control means SM23 sequentially displays the number of rounds and the number of winnings on the effect display device SG based on the game information sequentially transmitted from the main side (gameability and jackpots). It may be executed as needed based on the type).

  Next, in step 2514, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit being executed and the big hit symbol being stopped ( (For example, in the case of a special game or a small hit game related to the latent probability variation big hit symbol, the game state after the special game is ended is sent to the sub sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999) An effect that the person cannot recognize can be executed). Next, in step 2516, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game end display instruction command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2516, in step 2518, the background effect display control means SM23 performs jackpot end display on the effect display device SG (performs display appropriately based on the type of jackpot). Next, in step 2520, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the special game flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2600). . Note that if the answer is No in step 2504 or step 2516, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2600).

  Next, FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the stay stage determination process according to the subroutine of step 2600 in FIG. First, in step 2602, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the awakening stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2602, in step 2604, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the awakening stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2604, in step 2606, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “awakening stage” as the stay stage. Next, in step 2608, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2608, in step 2610, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the received counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c in the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2614. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2608, in step 2612, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a predetermined number of times (60 times in this example) in the awakening stage stay counter SM23c, and proceeds to step 2614. In addition, when the process of step 2612 is executed, it is supplemented that the game state on the main side is a probability variation game state and a time reduction game state.

  Next, in step 2614, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to step 2616. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2602, the process proceeds to step 2616. Next, in step 2616, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the awakening stage stay counter SM23c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. Note that the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c is configured to be decremented by 1 every change (every stop of the main game symbol). If YES in step 2616, the process proceeds to step 2618. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2616, in step 2619, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is won. In the case of Yes in step 2619, in step 2620, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the awakening stage stay counter SM23c to zero and proceeds to step 2618. Next, in step 2618, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the awakening stage flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even in the case of No in step 2619, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2604, in step 2621, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the devil stage flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 2621, in step 2622, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a devil stage transition command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2622, in step 2624, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “devil stage” as the stay stage. Next, in step 2626, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a command related to the counter value of the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 has been received from the main side. . In the case of Yes in step 2626, in step 2628, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the counter value of the received limited frequency counter BMN52c-2 in the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2634. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2626, in step 2630, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage gaming state notification value determination table and determines the devil stage gaming state notification value by lottery. Here, the lower part of the figure is an example of a devil stage gaming state notification value determination table. As shown in the figure, the devil stage gaming state notification value is configured so that two types of values of 10 and 30 can be selected, and 30 is easier to select than 10 (the gaming state is In the case of the probability variation gaming state, a large value is easily selected). Next, in step 2632, the background effect display control means SM23 sets the determined devil stage gaming state notification value in the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2, and proceeds to step 2634. In addition, when the process of step 2630 is executed, it is supplemented that the main game state is a probability variation game state and a non-time-reduced game state.

  Next, in step 2634, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns on the devil stage flag, and proceeds to step 2636. In the case of No in step 2621, the process proceeds to step 2636. Next, in step 2636, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. Note that the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 is configured to be decremented by 1 every change (every stop of the main game symbol). If Yes in step 2636, the process proceeds to step 2638. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2636, in step 2639, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not a special game is won. In the case of Yes in step 2639, in step 2640, the background effect display control means SM23 clears the counter value of the devil stage stay counter SM23c-2 to zero, and proceeds to step 2638. Next, in step 2638, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, turns off the devil stage flag, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 2999). Even in the case of No in step 2639, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2999).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2622, in step 2641, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation gaming state. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2641, in step 2642, the background effect display control means SM23 sets "probability change stage" (stay stage that can stay in the probability variation game state) as the stay stage, and performs the next processing (step 2999). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2641, in step 2644, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “non-probability variation stage” (stay stage that can stay in the non-probability variation gaming state) as the stay stage, and then The process proceeds to the process (step 2999).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, two types of losing symbols relating to the first main game are provided, and in the non-time-reduced gaming state, one losing symbol (in this example, “HA” )) Is determined, the variation mode may be different depending on the number of holdings at the time of variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is relatively short. In the example, when “HB”) is determined, the variation mode is not different depending on the number of suspensions at the time of variation related to the lost symbol, and the variation time is relatively long, By configuring the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information to be transmitted to the sub side at the time of the occurrence of the suspension, the selection tendency of the variation mode can be made different depending on the determined loss pattern, and the variation mode group is also changed. By the flop and fluctuation mode random delimiter information, it will be able to determine whether to execute prefetching lottery, so that it is reduced data capacity.

  In the present embodiment, as a prohibition condition of the prefetch lottery (prefetch lottery at the time of winning a prize), there is a second main game hold in the hold, a time-saving game state, and there is a big hit in the hold. (Excluding newly generated hold), there is a hold that has information indicating that the hold is a trigger hold in the hold, etc., but the prohibition condition of the pre-draw lottery is not limited to this, for example, Forbidden conditions may be a probability-variable gaming state, a predetermined background effect is being executed, a main game holding number is less than or equal to a predetermined number, a predetermined reach effect is scheduled to be executed, and the like.

  Further, in this embodiment, the lottery timing of the look-ahead lottery is the winning timing of the game ball to the main game start port (first main game start port A10), but is not limited to this, and the main game symbol of the main game symbol Fluctuation stop timing (decoration stop timing of decoration symbol), predetermined timing in the middle of fluctuation of the main game symbol (predetermined timing in the middle of variation of the decoration symbol), variation start timing of the main game symbol (variation start timing of decoration symbol), Etc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the predetermined big hit (4A, 5A, 3B, 4B) is finished, it can be shifted to a limited frequency, and a big hit other than the predetermined big hit (3A, 7A, 9A, 5B, 7B) It is configured not to shift to a limited frequency after the end.

(Second Embodiment)
Here, in this embodiment, there are two types of losing symbols related to the first main game and one type of losing symbol related to the second main game. However, selection of the variation mode based on the type of losing symbol or the determined losing symbol The trend is not limited to this. Therefore, the second embodiment is an example of a configuration that tends to select a variation mode based on the type of lost symbol different from the present embodiment or the determined lost symbol, and only the differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. To do. Note that the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is not a type of gaming machine in which the probability variation gaming state continues until the next jackpot occurs, but the probability variation gaming state is equal to a predetermined number of revolutions (for example, 80 symbols). If the big hit does not occur even if the change is continued), it is supplemented that the game machine is of the type that shifts to the non-stochastic fluctuation game state (the so-called ST type game machine). In addition, during the period in which this probability variation gaming state continues, the game is such that a transition from one limited frequency state to another limited frequency state occurs. Furthermore, since the second embodiment is also a modification based on the present embodiment, it is supplemented that any configuration shown in the present embodiment can be applied in the second embodiment.

  First, FIG. 32 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second) in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. First, at step 1464, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is a value within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50). . In the case of Yes in step 1464, in step 1466, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-1), and uses the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. Based on this, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to step 1474.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1464, in step 1468, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is a value within the second stage range (50 ≧ G> 10). It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1468, in step 1470, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-2), and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, Based on the number of reserved balls on the second main game side and the stop symbol related to the main game symbol, a variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to Step 1474.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1468, in other words, if the limited frequency counter value G is a value within the third stage range (10 ≧ G), in step 1472, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 With reference to the mode determination lottery table MN52ta (limited frequency table A-3), the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined based on the main game random number and the result of lottery determination, and the process proceeds to Step 1474.

  Next, in step 1474, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c and determines whether or not the counter value G is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1474, in step 1476, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining unit MN52 turns off the limited frequency A flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and performs the next processing (in step 1418). Process). Even in the case of No in step 1474, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1418).

  Next, FIG. 33 is an example of the variation mode determination lottery table (main game table 1) referred to in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of losing symbols (in this example, “HA”, “HB” and “HC”) on the first main game side, There are also a number of lost symbols on the second main game side (in this example, three types of “HD”, “HE”, and “HF”). The number and the number of lost symbols on the second main game side are the same number). In the second embodiment, the ratio of “HA” (“HD”) is higher than the ratio of “HB” (“HE”) in the lost symbol on the first main game (second main game) side, The ratio of “HB” (“HE”) is configured to be higher than the ratio of “HC” (“HF”). Moreover, in 2nd Embodiment, it is comprised so that the selection tendency of a fluctuation | variation aspect may differ with a loss symbol (details are mentioned later).

  Next, FIGS. 34 to 37 are examples of the variation mode determination lottery table (main game table 2) referred to in FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. As shown in the figure, the limited frequency table (limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta) in the second embodiment is different from the present embodiment in that the limited frequency table A-1, the limited frequency table A-2, the limited frequency table It is composed of a frequency table A-3 and a limited frequency table B. When the probability varying gaming state and the time-reducing gaming state (advantageous state A) are reached after the special game is finished, it is based on the number of fluctuations of the main game symbol. The limited frequency table referred to in the order of “limited frequency table A-1 → limited frequency table A-2 → limited frequency table A-3” is configured to be switched. More specifically, the limited frequency table A-1 is a table that can be referred to when the value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c (for example, G) is a value within a predetermined range (80 ≧ G> 50). The limited frequency table A-2 is a table that can be referred to when the limited frequency counter value G is a value within a predetermined range (50 ≧ G> 10), and the limited frequency table A-3 is the limited frequency counter A-3. It is a table which can be referred when the value G is a value within a predetermined range (10 ≧ G). When referring to the limited frequency table A-1 and the limited frequency table A-3, the variation mode is determined regardless of the number of holds, and on the other hand, when referring to the limited frequency table A-2, the hold is held. It is comprised so that a fluctuation | variation aspect may differ with numbers.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 35 (particularly, FIG. 35), in this example, in the variation determination table on the first main game side, the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “ In the case of “HA”, the variation mode having a short time (in this example, the variation time is 15 seconds or less) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively low expectation level is easily selected). . On the other hand, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, if the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HC”, it is relatively longer than the case where the determined symbol is “HA” (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more) ) Is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot is easily selected). Furthermore, in the non-time-shortening gaming state, when the result of winning / failing lottery is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, there is a variation mode other than a specific variation mode (a variation mode in which the variation time is 60 seconds in this example). It is configured so that it can be easily selected.

  Here, in the variation mode on the first main game (second main game) side in the non-time-reduced game state (in the time-reduced game state), the lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “HA” (“HD”) ) Is configured so that the variation time may be relatively different depending on the number of holds at the time of holding, and the lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “HB” or “HC” (“HE” or “HF”). ")" Is configured so that the fluctuation time is relatively unlikely to differ depending on the number of holds at the time of holding. For example, regarding the first main game symbol variation (second main game symbol variation) in the non-time-reduced gaming state (time-reduced gaming state), the lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “HA” (“HD”). In this case, the contents of the variation mode determination table to be referred to are switched in accordance with the number of reservations on the first main game side (the variation mode referred to when the number of reservations is 0 to 1 and when the number of reservations is 2 to 3). The content of the decision table is changed). Specifically, when the determined symbol is “HA” (“HD”), the variation time (and the production mode) may differ depending on the number of holdings at the start of the variation { Configured to be uncertain {if the decision symbol is "HB" or "HC" ("HE" or "HF") ) Can be determined. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In the variation mode on the first main game (second main game) side in the non-time-reduced game state (in the time-reduced game state), the winning / losing lottery result is lost and the lost symbol is “ With respect to holdings that are “HA” or “HB” (“HD” or “HE”), it is configured so that the variation time may be relatively different depending on the number of holdings at the time of holding, and the lottery result is lost and the lost pattern is Regarding the hold that is “HC” (“HF”), the variation time may be relatively unlikely to be different depending on the number of holds at the time of holding.

  On the other hand, in the variation mode on the first main game side in the non-time-reduced gaming state, the variation time is long variation (for example, 60 seconds or more) in the normal time when the loss symbol is “HB” or “HC”. ) Is easily selected, but at the limited frequency (when the limited frequency B flag is on), as shown in the limited frequency table B, the variation time is long (for example, 60 seconds). It is configured so that it is difficult to select the reach effect as described above.

  Furthermore, as shown in the figure, in the case of a loss, the limited frequency table A-3 is more easily selected than the limited frequency table A-2, so that the variation time of a relatively short time can be selected. 1 is more easily selected than the limited frequency table A-3. With this configuration, when the gaming state is a probability-variable gaming state and a time-reduced gaming state, it is determined that the gaming state will continue until the next special game winning, so a predetermined period {this example Then, from the end of the special game to the end of the 30th change (from the start of the 31st change to the end of the 70th change)} If the big hit is not won, the table to be referred to is the limited frequency table A- Switching from 1 to the limited frequency table A-2 (the limited frequency table A-2 to the limited frequency table A-3) changes the relative time, so the time until winning the big hit changes, The fatigue of the person can be reduced.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 37, regarding the second main game symbol variation, when the “HF” (and “HE”) symbol is determined, the variation has a relatively long variation time in the time reduction gaming state. While the mode is easily selected, the variation mode in which the variation time is relatively short in the non-time-reduced gaming state is easily selected.

  In the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, it is more relative than when the determined symbol is “HA”. Therefore, it is easy to select a variation mode having a long time (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot), and the variation time to be selected is The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, compared to the case where the determined symbol is “HA” A predetermined variation mode that becomes a long time (for example, a variation mode that becomes 120 seconds) is easily selected.

  In addition, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HC”, it is more relative than when the determined symbols are “HA” and “HB”. The variation mode having a long time (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot is easily selected), and the average variation time is selected. The value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HC”, the determined symbols are “HA” and “HB”. It is configured so that a predetermined fluctuation mode (for example, a fluctuation mode of 120 seconds) that takes a longer time than in the case of is easily selected.

  Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, the determined symbol is “HA”. However, it is easy to select a variation mode that is relatively long (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot) and the variation to be selected. The average time is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, compared to the case where the determined symbol is “HA” A predetermined variation mode that becomes a long time (for example, a variation mode that becomes 120 seconds) is easily selected.

  In addition, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HC”, it is more relative than when the determined symbols are “HA” and “HB”. The variation mode having a long time (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot is easily selected), and the average variation time is selected. The value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the present embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced game state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HC”, the determined symbols are “HA” and “HB”. It is configured so that a predetermined fluctuation mode (for example, a fluctuation mode of 120 seconds) that takes a longer time than in the case of is easily selected. Here, in the second embodiment, there are a plurality of types of jackpot symbols related to the second main game symbol variation, and the advantage to the player is different in different jackpot symbols (in this example, for example, the jackpot symbol is In the case of 3B, the 2R short-open big hit is relatively low, and when the big hit symbol is 7B, the 16R long open big hit is relatively high). Under such circumstances, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when a specific effect (for example, a reach effect or a change in which the change time becomes relatively long) occurs due to the second main game symbol change. In the case where the specific effect does not result in a big hit with a high advantage, a big hit with a relatively low advantage (or a big hit with a relatively low advantage) may be configured. (As a premise, in the second main game symbol variation at the time of losing in the non-time-reduced gaming state, regardless of the type of symbol determined at the time of losing, the specific effect is not executed or difficult to execute There).

  In the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, it is more relative than when the determined symbol is “HA”. Therefore, it is easy to select a variation mode having a long time (in this example, the variation time is 30 seconds or more) (that is, it is easy to select an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot), and the variation time to be selected is The average value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HB”, the determined symbol is “HA”. Also, a predetermined variation mode that is a long time (for example, a variation mode that is 120 seconds) is easily selected.

  In addition, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HC”, it is more relative than when the determined symbols are “HA” and “HB”. The variation mode having a long time (in this example, the variation time is 60 seconds or more) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot is easily selected), and the average variation time is selected. The value is configured to be relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the first main game side, in the non-time-reduced gaming state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HC”, the determined symbols are “HA” and “HB” ”Is configured so that a predetermined fluctuation mode (for example, a fluctuation mode of 120 seconds) that takes a longer time is more easily selected.

  Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the time-reduced game state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HE”, the determined symbol is “HD”. A variation mode having a relatively long time (in this example, a variation time of 30 seconds or more) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot is easily selected) and the variation time selected The average value of is relatively long. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the time-reduced game state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HE”, the determined symbol is “HD”. A predetermined variation mode that becomes a long time (for example, a variation mode that becomes 120 seconds) is easily selected.

  In addition, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, in the time-reduced game state, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HF”, it is relatively more than when the determined symbols are “HD” and “HE”. A variation mode having a long time (in this example, a variation time of 60 seconds or more) is easily selected (that is, an effect with a relatively high expectation degree of jackpot is easily selected), and the average value of the variation times selected Is configured to have a relatively long time. Further, in the second embodiment, regarding the variation mode on the second main game side, when the winning / failing lottery result is lost and the determined symbol is “HF” in the time reduction gaming state, the determined symbols are “HD” and “HE”. It is configured so that a predetermined fluctuation mode (for example, a fluctuation mode of 120 seconds) that takes a longer time than in the case of is easily selected.

  Also, in this example, when there are fluctuations related to the loss of the main game symbol and there are two or three holding balls, the fluctuation time (5 seconds) that is most easily selected in the second stage of the three stage ST and the third stage In the fluctuation time (20 seconds) that is most easily selected, the third stage has a longer fluctuation time. On the other hand, when there are fluctuations related to the big hit of the main game symbol and there are two or three holding balls, the fluctuation time (60 seconds) that is most easily selected in the second stage of the three stage ST and the most selected in the third stage In the easy fluctuation time (20 seconds), the second stage has a longer fluctuation time.

  Next, FIG. 38 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1550 of FIG. 10 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 1554 (second) to Step 1560 (second) and Step 1580 (second). First, in step 1554 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is greater than zero. In the case of Yes in step 1554 (second), in step 1556 (second), the specific game control means MP50 decrements (decrements) the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c. Next, in step 1558 (second), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the probability variation number counter MP51c and determines whether or not the counter value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1558 (second), in step 1560 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns off the main game probability change flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. 1570 is entered. Note that if the answer is No in step 1554 (second) or step 1558 (second), the process proceeds to step 1570. On the other hand, after turning off the auxiliary game short time flag in step 1578, in step 1580 (second), the specific game control means MP50 is a specific game end command (a command to the sub-side, the specific game is ended, The command related to the information indicating that the gaming state has been entered) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 39 is a flowchart of specific game end determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 1600 of FIG. 5 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 1605 (second) and Step 1615 (second). That is, after turning off the specific game flag in step 1604, in step 1605 (second), the special game control means MP30 clears the count value of the probability variation counter MP51c to zero, and proceeds to step 1606. On the other hand, after turning off the condition device operation flag in step 1614, in step 1615 (second), the special game control means MP30 is a specific game end command (a command to the sub-side, the specific game ends, The command related to the information indicating that the gaming state has been entered) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (transmitted to the sub-main control unit SM by the control command transmission process in step 1999). Then, the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1700).

  Next, FIG. 40 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of step 1750 of FIG. 20 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that step 1755 (second), step 1761 (second), step 1763 (second), step 1779 (second), step 1783-1 (second) and step 1783-2 (Second). That is, after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1754, in step 1755 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times) in the probability change number counter MP51c, and proceeds to step 1756. . On the other hand, in the case of Yes in Step 1756 or Yes in Step 1776, the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times) in the limited frequency counter AMN 52c in Step 1761 (second), and proceeds to Step 1762.

  On the other hand, after the limited frequency A flag is turned on in step 1762, in step 1763 (second), the specific game control means MP50 is a specific game start command (a command to the sub side, the specific game starts, and the probability A command related to information indicating that the game state is a variable game state and a time-reduced game state) is set in the command transmission buffer MT10 for transmission to the sub-main control unit SM (the sub-main control unit by the control command transmission process in step 1999) Sent to SM side). Next, in step 1779 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times) in the time reduction number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1778.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1776, in step 1783-1 (second), the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (30 times) in the limited frequency counter BMN52c-2. Next, in step 1783-2 (second), the specific game control means MP50 turns on the limited frequency B flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage means MN52b, and proceeds to step 1784. Thus, in the second embodiment, when the short open big hit (3A, 3B) is won during ST, the predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) is reset in the probability variation counter MP51c, and the limitation is made. The frequency counter value will increase from 0. On the other hand, if a small win is won, the limited frequency counter value will not be cleared, and the limited frequency counter value before the small hit will be taken over. .

  Next, FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the first main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2150 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is step 2161 (second), and the purpose is that all the hold before the hold to be prefetched lottery is a short variation time. In other words, if there is no big hit hold on the first main game hold before the new hold in step 2160, in step 2161 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k is displayed. With reference to the hold information temporary storage means SM22b, all the hold stop symbols on the first main game side before the new hold are all “HA” (the first main game side on which the shortest fluctuation time can be easily selected) It is determined whether or not it is a lost pattern. If Yes in step 2161 (second), the process proceeds to step 2162. If No, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2112). In addition, in this example, it is configured to be able to execute the hold prefetch lottery only when all the holds on the first main game side before the new hold are holds for the lost HA. For example, only when the first main game side hold before the new hold is a hold for the lost HA, and is a hold of group 1 (hold corresponding to break 1 or 2) The holding pre-read lottery may be executed.

  Next, FIG. 42 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2200 of FIG. 24 in the second embodiment. The difference from the present embodiment is that step 2207-1 (second), step 2207-1 (second), step 2223 (second) to step 2230 (second), step 2232 (second) to step 2238. (Second) and Step 2240 (second), and the purpose is to make the execution mode of the pre-fetch lottery different depending on the stay stage during the specific game (in the time-saving game state). That is, in the case of Yes in step 2206, in step 2207-1 (second), the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and refers to the second main data before the new hold. It is determined whether or not the suspended symbols on the game side are all “HD” (the second main game side lose symbol which is relatively easy to select the variation time). In the case of Yes in step 2207-1 (second), in step 2207-2 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM 26 k is currently set with reference to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM 23 b. It is determined whether or not the stay stage is a “long production stage” (a stay stage in which the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table A-2). If Yes in step 2207-2 (second), the process proceeds to step 2208. On the other hand, if No in step 2207-2 (second), in step 2223 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k is currently set with reference to the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b. It is determined whether or not the stay stage is a “fixed stage” (a stay stage in which the variation mode is determined with reference to the limited frequency table A-3). In the case of Yes in step 2223 (second), in step 2224 (second), the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and the new hold becomes a big hit hold. It is determined whether or not. In the case of Yes in step 2224 (second), in step 2226 (second), the holding pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k executes a winning pre-read lottery to win with a predetermined probability (1/4 in this example). , The process proceeds to step 2220. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2224 (second) (that is, in the case where the new hold is a hold that is lost), in step 2230 (second), the hold-reading pre-production effect execution determination unit SM26k has a predetermined probability ( In this example, a winning look-ahead lottery for winning in 1/6) is executed, and the process proceeds to step 2220. If No in step 2223 (second) {that is, if the currently set stay stage is the “short effect stage” (the stage referring to the limited frequency table A-1)}, the next process The process proceeds to (Step 2112). In this example, the hold pre-read lottery can be executed only when the hold on the second main game side before the new hold is all for the hold HD. Without limitation, for example, only when the hold on the second main game side before the new hold is all for hold HD and is a hold of group A (hold corresponding to break 1 or 2) The holding pre-read lottery may be executed.

  Next, in the case of Yes in step 2220, in step 2232 (second), the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the number of holds temporarily stored in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b, and performs the lottery. Deriving the number Ha (0 to 4 times) of fluctuation stoppage of the main game symbol until the winning hold (trigger hold) is consumed. Next, in step 2234 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution availability determination means SM26k refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c-3, and based on the counter value, the main game symbol until the current stay stage is completed. The fluctuation stop count Hb is derived. Next, in step 2236 (second), the pending pre-reading effect execution possibility determination means SM26k is configured to execute the pre-reading effect (Ha in this example) as the minimum number of pre-reading effects (effective pre-reading effect is executed). It is determined whether or not the minimum number of times, for example, twice or more. In the case of Yes in step 2236 (second), in step 2238 (second), the hold prefetch effect execution possibility determination means SM26k satisfies the relationship Ha ≦ Hb that the derived Ha and Hb are satisfied (prefetch effect). Is finished during the current stay stage). In the case of Yes in step 2238 (second), in step 2222, the hold pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k determines that the new hold that is won in the winning pre-read lottery in the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b. Information indicating “trigger hold” is added and temporarily stored. Next, in step 2240 (second), the pending pre-reading effect execution availability determination means SM26k sets Ha to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c, and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2112). On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2207-1 (second), step 2236 (second), or step 2238 (second), the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2112).

  As described above, in the second embodiment, the prefetch lottery is not executed when the user stays at the “short stage stage”. Note that this example is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the prefetch lottery may not be executed in the “fixed stage” but the prefetch lottery may be executed in the “short stage”. Good.

  As described above, in the second embodiment, “HA” and “HD” among the suspensions related to the loss are configured not to be subject to the pre-read lottery (because they are not group 3). ). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both “HA” and “HD” may be subject to pre-fetch lottery. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable that the pre-draw lottery is more difficult to win than other lost symbols. In the pre-reading lottery relating to the first main game, “HC” is better than “HB”, and in the pre-reading lottery relating to the second main game, “HF” is better than “HE”. Since the probability of selection is high (because there are many random numbers), it is configured so that it is easy to win a prefetch lottery. In addition, the suspended symbols to be consumed before the trigger suspension is “HA” in the case of the prefetch lottery relating to the first main game, and “HD” in the case of the prefetch lottery relating to the first main game. In addition, the prefetch lottery on the second main game side is configured not to execute the prefetch lottery when the stay stage is different from the current stage when the hold that is the subject of the prefetch lottery is digested.

  Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart of the decorative symbol display content determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2300 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is step 2350 (second). That is, after the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decoration symbol are determined in step 2306 and temporarily stored in the drawing display related information temporary storage means SM21b, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is described later in step 2350 (second). The pre-reading execution content determination process is performed.

  Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart of pre-reading execution content determination processing according to the subroutine of step 2350 (second) in FIG. 43 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2352, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and the specific game running flag (the specific game running flag is turned on in step 2656). It is determined whether or not) is off. If Yes in step 2352, in step 2364, the drawing display content determination means SM21n determines whether or not the counter value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c is greater than zero. If Yes in step 2364, in step 2366, the drawing display content determination means SM21n decrements (decrements) the counter value of the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. Next, in step 2368, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and determines whether or not the currently set stay stage is the “long effect stage”. judge. In the case of Yes in step 2368, in step 2370, the drawing display content determination means SM21n reads a prefetch effect dedicated to the “long effect stage” (for example, “at the beginning of the change, XX times…!” And a prefetch effect execution counter SM26c. A command for displaying an effect of counting down the value of the value is set, and the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2308).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2368, in other words, when the prefetching effect is executed in the “fixed effect stage”, in step 2372, the holding prefetch effect execution control means SM26 determines whether or not the “fixed effect stage” is changed. The content of the stage effect is determined as a pre-read stage effect dedicated to the stage (for example, an effect in which the background display color changes based on the big hit expectation level), and the process proceeds to the next process (step 2308 process). It should be noted that also in the case of No in step 2352 or step 2364, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 2308).

  Next, FIG. 45 is a flowchart of a stay stage prefetching execution content determination process according to the subroutine of Step 2600 of FIG. 23 in the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not a specific game start command has been received from the main side {in this example, the main side does not It is determined whether or not the probability variation / non-time shortening gaming state has shifted to the probability variation / time shortening gaming state}. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 sets an initial value (for example, 1) to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 turns on the specific game running flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2666.

  Here, the specific game running flag is a flag indicating a specific game (for example, a probability-variable game state and a time-reduced game state, so-called ST) state, and is turned on when the specific game starts. The jackpot or stay stage management counter SM23c is turned off when the value exceeds an upper limit (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2652, in step 2658, the background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the specific game end command has been received from the main side {for example, refer to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b. Determination, or determination whether the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c exceeds an upper limit value (for example, 80, which is the upper limit number of STs)}. In the case of Yes in step 2658, in step 2660, the background effect display control means SM23 resets (zero clears) the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c. Next, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 turns off the specific game running flag in the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b, and proceeds to step 2666. In the case of No in step 2658, the process proceeds to step 2666.

  Next, in step 2666, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the flag area of the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b and determines whether or not the specific game running flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 2666, in step 2668, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b and determines whether or not the main game symbol has been newly stopped. In the case of Yes in step 2668, in step 2670, the background effect display control means SM23 adds 1 to the value of the stay stage management counter SM23c (increment), and proceeds to step 2672. On the other hand, if No in step 2668, the process proceeds to step 2672 without executing the process in step 2670.

  Next, in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and determines whether or not the counter value is a value (1 to 30) within the first range. In the case of Yes in step 2672, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “short effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b) and the next process (step 2999). The process proceeds to (1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2672, in step 2676, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the second range (31 to 70). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2676, in step 2678, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “long effect stage” as the stay stage (temporarily stored in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999). The process proceeds to (1).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2676, in step 2680, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the stay stage management counter SM23c, and whether or not the counter value is a value within the third range (71 to 80). Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2680, in step 2682, the background effect display control means SM23 sets “fixed effect stage” as the stay stage (temporary storage in the background effect related information temporary storage means SM23b), and the next process (step 2999). The process proceeds to (1). Note that if the answer is No in step 2666 or step 2680 (for example, if the game is not in a specific game), the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 2999).

(Function)
Next, the effect | action in 2nd Embodiment is demonstrated, referring FIG. First, the figure is an operation diagram showing a prefetch effect during a specific game after the end of the special game. In addition, in this example, the case where a specific game is completed without winning a big hit is illustrated.

  First, in the situation of the probability variation gaming state and the time shortening gaming state, after the number of holding balls on the first main game side is digested and the number of holding balls on the second main game side becomes four, at the timing of 1 in the figure The second main game symbol will start to change. Next, at the timing of 2 in the figure, when the main game symbol fluctuates 30 times after the special game, the short effect stage ends and the long effect stage is entered.

  Next, at the timing of 3 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long production stage is 40 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 4 in the figure, since the first second main game symbol has started to change after the execution of the prefetching effect is determined, the prefetching effect is executed from the change.

  Next, at the timing of 5 in the figure, the change of the second main game symbol related to the digestion of the trigger hold is started. The change related to the trigger hold is a loss, and the change related to the trigger hold in the long performance stage is a change time of 10 seconds or more, and thus the change time is 60 seconds. Next, at the timing of 6 in the figure, the pre-reading effect ends when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends.

  Next, at the timing of 7 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 3 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the end of the long performance stage is 1 (Ha> Hb). Will not be. Next, at the timing of 8 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 70 times after the special game, the long effect stage is ended and the process proceeds to the fixed effect stage.

  Next, at the timing of 9 in the figure, it is determined whether or not the pre-reading effect can be executed due to the occurrence of a trigger suspension that can trigger the execution of the pre-reading effect. At this timing, the number of fluctuation stops Ha until the trigger suspension is 2 and the number of fluctuation stops Hb until the fixed stage is finished is 10 (Ha ≦ Hb). Will be. Next, at the timing of 10 in the figure, since the first change of the second main game symbol has started after the execution of the prefetch effect is determined, the prefetch effect is executed from the change. Next, at the timing of 11 in the figure, the pre-reading effect is ended when the change of the main game symbol related to the trigger hold ends. Note that since the prefetching effect is a prefetching effect in the fixed effect stage, the fluctuation time related to the trigger suspension is also 5 seconds. Next, at the timing of 12 in the figure, when the main game symbol has changed 80 times after the special game, the fixed effect stage ends and the specific game also ends.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the second embodiment, three types of losing symbols are provided on each of the first main game side and the second main game side, and the probability variation gaming state and the time reduction are provided. In the gaming state, the limited frequency table to be referred to (variation mode determination table) is switched according to the number of times of change since the end of the special game, so that the character of the lost symbol can be made different depending on the limited frequency table to be referred to. At the same time, it is possible to determine whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed based on the variation mode group and the variation mode random number delimiter information, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Modification 1 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, when the prefetch effect straddles the end of the stay stage, the prefetch effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the prefetch effect is appropriately executed. By doing so, it is possible to produce an effect that further enhances the interest of the game. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the second main game winning prefetch determination process according to the subroutine of step 2200 in FIG. 24 in the first modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2242 (second modification 1), step 2244 (second modification 1), step 2246 (second modification 1), and step 2248 (second modification 1). That is, in step 2222, information indicating that “trigger hold” is added to the new hold selected in the winning look-ahead lottery and temporarily stored, and then in step 2242 (second variation 1), the hold pre-reading effect is executed. The admissibility determining means SM26k refers to the drawing hold information temporary storage means SM22b and determines whether or not the new hold is a big hit hold (in addition, the new hold is a big hit) It may be determined whether or not the hold is a hold, or whether or not the hold is a loss and the loss symbol is “HF”). If Yes in step 2242 (second modification 1), the process proceeds to step 2240 (second). On the other hand, if the answer is No in step 2242 (second change 1) (that is, if the new hold is a hold that is lost), in step 2244 (second change 1), the hold-prefetch effect execution control means SM26 It is determined whether or not Ha ≦ Hb, in other words, whether or not the hold that has been won in the pre-reading effect lottery is digested during the current stay stage. In the case of Yes in step 2244 (second variation 1), in step 2246 (second variation 1), the holding pre-reading effect execution control means SM26 sets Ha to the pre-reading effect execution counter SM26c, and the next process (in step 2122). Process). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2244 (second variation 1), in step 2248 (second variation 1), the hold prefetch effect execution control means SM26 sets Hb in the prefetch effect execution counter SM26c and performs the next processing (step 2112).

  By changing as described above, in the first modification from the second embodiment, when the prefetching effect related to the big hit is executed, the prefetching effect is planned to be executed over the next stay stage. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect related to the loss (so-called “gase effect”) is executed, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stay stage, The pre-reading effect is configured to end with the final change in the stay stage, and various pre-reading effects are executed, and the fun of the game is enhanced.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, the pre-reading effect is also executed as it is when it is scheduled to be executed over the next stay stage. When the pre-reading effect is to be executed, if the pre-reading effect is scheduled to be executed over the next stay stage, the pre-reading effect ends at the final change in the current stay stage, When the pre-reading effect is executed with the final change, when the pre-reading effect is continuously executed with the next change, it becomes definite that the pre-reading effect is a pre-reading effect related to the big hit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the change of stay stage switching, and the fun of the game is enhanced. In this embodiment, after executing the pre-reading effect lottery, the pre-reading effect execution possibility determination (and determination of whether or not to interrupt) is performed according to the determination of whether or not to cross the stay stage. However, the order of processing related to the pre-reading effects may be changed as appropriate. For example, the pre-reading effect lottery may be executed after it is determined that the stay stage is crossed.

  In the first modification from the second embodiment, when the pre-reading effect is executed across the next stay stage, it becomes definite that it will be a big hit, and it ends without straddling the next stay stage. Although it was configured to be definitive in some cases, it is not limited to this, and conversely, if it ends without straddling the next stay stage, it will be decisive that it will be a big hit It may be configured, even if the pre-reading effect straddles the next stay stage, even if it does not straddle, it can be configured to win both big hits and loses, even if the expectation level that makes a big hit differs Good (for example, when a pre-reading effect is executed across the stay stages, the possibility that the change related to the pre-reading will be a big hit is higher than the possibility of being lost). In addition, when the pre-reading effect related to the big hit is executed, if the pre-reading effect ends with the final fluctuation in the current stay stage, the big hit is deterministic due to the change related to the holding (trigger hold) that becomes the big hit. It may be configured to execute the following effects (for example, generation of a notification sound for determining the big hit, dropping of an object for determining the big hit, etc.).

(Modification 2 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, each stay stage is always switched in the same pattern during the specific game. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and by providing a plurality of effect switching patterns during the specific game, It is possible to further enhance interest. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a second modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the special game related display control process according to the subroutine of step 2500 in FIG. 23 in the second modification from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 2525 (second variation 2) and step 2650 (second variation 2). That is, in step 2514, after setting a command to display an effect related to the special game being executed based on the game state at the time of winning the big hit being won and the jackpot symbol being stopped, step 2525 (second variable 2) ), The background effect display control means SM23 determines whether or not the big hit is a first hit (a big hit in the non-probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state). In the case of Yes in step 2525 (second variation 2), in step 2650 (second variation 2), the background effect display control means SM23 performs an effect mode determination process described later, and proceeds to step 2516. On the other hand, also in the case of No in step 2525 (second variation 2), the process proceeds to step 2516.

  Next, FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the effect mode determination process according to the subroutine of step 2650 (second modification 2) in FIG. 48 in Modification 2 from the second embodiment. First, in step 2652, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not the special game round being executed is the effect mode selection round (in this example, the first R). Determine. In the case of Yes in step 2652, in step 2654, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command related to image display that prompts the effect mode selection (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999). To do). Next, in step 2656, the background effect display control means SM23 refers to the sub input button input detection device SBs and determines whether or not the sub input button SB is newly pressed. In the case of Yes in step 2656, in step 2658, the background effect display control means SM23 switches the effect mode that has been set (for example, battle mode → escape mode, escape mode → battle mode), and proceeds to step 2660. In addition, also in the case of No in step 2652 or step 2656, the process proceeds to step 2660.

  Here, in this example, “battle mode” is set at the start of the production mode selection round, and when a power interruption occurs after the production mode is determined, the “battle” which is the default production mode after the power interruption is restored. "Mode" is configured to be reset.

  Next, at step 2660, the notice effect display control means SM24 refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and whether the round of the special game being executed is the effect mode determination round (in this example, the second R) or not. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2660, in step 2662, the background effect display control means SM23 sets a command for displaying the effect mode set at the end of the effect mode selection round (in the display command transmission control process of step 2999, Is transmitted to the control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 2516). In the case of No in step 2660, the process proceeds to the next process (the process in step 2516).

  By changing as described above, in the second modification from the second embodiment, a plurality of effect content determination tables are provided in a certain stay stage, and the effect mode is determined with reference to which effect content table during the special game. By configuring so that the player can arbitrarily select whether or not to perform, the variation of the production during the specific game will increase, and the production according to the player's taste can be executed. Interesting will increase.

(Modification 3 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, the number of changes in the time-reduced gaming state after the end of the special game and the number of changes in the probability-variable gaming state are always the same number of changes. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is possible to create a new gameability by making the number of times of change to the time-reduced game state after the end of the special game different from the number of times of change to the probability-change game state. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a third modification from the second embodiment, and only the changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below. In the third modification from the second embodiment, it is configured not to have a limited frequency B (the limited frequency is the limited frequency B), and the second embodiment is a big hit symbol. The content (the game state to be transferred after the end of the big hit) is different.

  First, FIG. 50 shows the first main game symbol display process (second main game symbol) related to the subroutine of Step 1400 (1) {Step 1400 (2)} in FIG. 9 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. It is a flowchart of a display process. Changes from the second embodiment are Step 1413 (second modification 3), step 1415 (second modification 3), step 1450 (second modification 3), step 1417 (second modification 3), and step 1850 (first modification). 2 variation 3). That is, in step 1410, after determining a stop symbol for the main game symbol based on the main game symbol determination lottery result and the first main game content determination random number (second main game content determination random number), step 1413 (second variable 3) ), The first main game symbol determination means MN41-A (second main game symbol determination means MN41-B) determines whether or not the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1413 (second variable 3), in step 1415 (second variable 3), the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 specifies the specific game type flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b. (Long specific game flag, similar short specific game flag, short specific game flag) are turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1416. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1413 (second variation 3), in step 1450 (second variation 3), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 executes a limited frequency A variation mode determination process described later. Next, in step 1417 (second variation 3), the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 decrements (decrements) the counter value of the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and proceeds to step 1418.

  In step 1436, if the stop symbol is a big hit symbol, in step 1850 (second variation 3), the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 executes a limited frequency type determination process described later, and proceeds to step 1438. To do.

  Next, FIG. 51 is a flowchart of limited frequency A variation mode determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1450 (second variation 3) in FIG. 50 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1478, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b to determine whether or not the long specific game flag is on. In the case of Yes in step 1478, in step 1479, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is within the first stage range (80 ≧ G> 50 in this example). It is determined whether it is a value. In the case of Yes in step 1479, in step 1480, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-1 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and uses the main game side random number and the winning / failing lottery result. Based on this, the variation mode (variation time) relating to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {the processing of Step 1417 (second variation 3)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1479, in step 1482, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is within the second stage range (in this example, 50 ≧ G> 10 ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1482, in step 1483, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, Based on the number of reserved balls on the second main game side, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of Step 1417 (second variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1482, in step 1484, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, the right / fail lottery. Based on the result, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {the processing of Step 1417 (second variation 3)}. In addition, the process of the said step 1478-step 1484 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect concerning a long specific game.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1478, in step 1486, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 refers to the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b and determines whether or not the short specific game flag is on. To do. In the case of Yes in step 1486, in step 1487, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 stores the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). Referring to the main game table 3, based on the main game side random numbers and the result of lottery determination, the variation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol is determined and the next processing {the processing of step 1417 (second variation 3)} is performed. To do. In addition, the process of the said step 1486 and step 1487 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a short specific game.

  In the case of No in step 1486, in other words, if the similar short specific game flag is on, in step 1488, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is It is determined whether or not the value is within one range (in this example, 80 ≧ G> 50). In the case of Yes in step 1488, in step 1489, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 stores the first main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-A (second main game variation mode determination lottery table MN51ta-B). Referring to the main game table 3, based on the main game side random numbers and the result of lottery determination, the variation mode (variation time) for the main game symbol is determined and the next processing {the processing of step 1417 (second variation 3)} is performed. To do.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1488, in step 1490, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency counter AMN52c, and the counter value G is within the second stage range (in this example, 50 ≧ G> 10). ) Is determined. In the case of Yes in step 1490, in step 1492, the limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-2 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, the winning / failing lottery result, Based on the number of reserved balls on the second main game side, the variation mode (variation time) regarding the main game symbol is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process {the process of Step 1417 (second variation 3)}. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1490, in step 1494, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 refers to the limited frequency table A-3 in the limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table MN52ta, and determines the main game side random number, whether or not to win Based on the result, the variation mode (variation time) related to the main game symbol is determined, and the processing proceeds to the next processing {the processing of Step 1417 (second variation 3)}. In addition, the process of the said step 1488-step 1494 is a process which determines the fluctuation | variation aspect which concerns on a similar short specific game.

  Here, the limited frequency table reference table in the lower part of the figure is a table in which the limited frequency tables to be referred to are collected for each limited frequency counter value in each specific game. As shown in the figure, when the long specific game flag is on, the table to be referred is switched in the order of the limited frequency table A-1 → the limited frequency table A-2 → the limited frequency table A-3, and the similar short When the specific game flag is on, the table to be referenced is switched in the order of the main game table 3 → the limited frequency table A-2 → the limited frequency table A-3, and when the short specific game flag is on, it is referred to. The table is only the main game table. Further, since the limited frequency table to be referred to is the same when the similar short specific game flag is on and when the short specific game flag is on, which specific game is the player (specific game) It will be difficult to determine how long will it last.

  In this way, when the short specific game flag is on (after the big hit relating to 3A), the main game table 3 is referred to without referring to the limited frequency table A-1. In addition, after the time shortening game ends (after 30 fluctuations have elapsed), when the long specific game flag is on, the limited frequency table A-2 is referred to, whereas the short specific game flag is on The main game table 3 is referred to. In addition, even after the jackpot for 3A is over, if the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot is a time-saving gaming state, the limited frequency table A-1 will be referred to after the jackpot is over. .

  Next, FIG. 52 is a flowchart of limited frequency type determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1850 (second modified 3) in FIG. 50 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. First, in step 1852, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit in the probability variation gaming state. In the case of Yes in Step 1852, in Step 1856, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 sets the predetermined frequency A (for example, 80 times) to the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Next, in step 1858, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 turns on the long specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1438). .

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1852, in other words, if the big hit symbol is a big hit (initial hit) in the normal gaming state, in step 1854, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 It is determined whether the symbol is a long specific game symbol (in this example, 7A, 7B, 5B, 3B). If YES in step 1854, the process proceeds to step 1856.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1854, in Step 1860, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines whether or not the stopped big hit symbol is a similar short specific game symbol (5A in this example). . In the case of Yes in step 1860, in step 1862, the limited frequency fluctuation mode determining means MN52 sets the predetermined frequency A (for example, 80 times) to the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Next, in step 1864, the limited frequency variation mode determining unit MN52 turns on the similar short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process of step 1438). To do. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1860, in other words, when the jackpot symbol being stopped is the short specific symbol (3A in this example), in step 1866, the limited frequency variation mode determining means MN52 determines the limited frequency counter AMN52c. Is set to a predetermined number of times B (for example, the number of times is 30, but is not limited to this. It is preferable that the number is less than the predetermined number of times A). Next, in step 1868, the limited frequency variation mode determination unit MN52 turns on the short specific game flag in the flag area of the limited frequency related information temporary storage unit MN52b, and proceeds to the next process (process in step 1438). .

  Next, FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 in FIG. 20 in Modification 3 from the second embodiment. Changes from the second embodiment are step 1755 (second modification 3), step 1784 (second modification 3), and step 1786 (second modification 3). That is, after turning on the main game probability change flag in step 1754, in step 1755 (second change 3) and step 1763 (second), the specific game control means MP50 counts the probability change number counter MP51c a predetermined number of times (in this example, , 80 times) and a specific game start command (command to the sub-side). Next, in step 1784 (second variation 3), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the short specific game flag is off. In the case of Yes in step 1784 (second variation 3), the process proceeds to step 1779 (second), and the specific game control means MP50 sets a predetermined number of times (80 times in this example) in the time-count counter MP52c. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1784 (second variation 3) (in the case of a short specific game (ie, in the case where the big hit symbol is 3A)), in step 1786 (second variation 3), the specific game control means MP50. Sets a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 times) in the time reduction number counter MP52c, and proceeds to step 1778.

  Thus, in the third modified example from the second embodiment, when the short specific game flag is on (after the big hit relating to 3A), 80 is set in the probability variation counter MP51c, and Since the count counter MP52c is set to 30 times, the probability variation number and the time reduction number are configured to be different.

  By changing as described above, according to the third modification from the second embodiment, the period (number of fluctuations) in the time-saving gaming state after the special game is made different depending on the jackpot symbol, and in the time-saving gaming state By referring to the same variation mode determination table for a case where a certain period is short and long, even when the number of variations that result in a time-reduced gaming state is different, the variation in the same variation mode (and effect content) ( And execution), it becomes difficult for the player to recognize how long the time-reduced gaming state that is being executed will last, and the entertainment of the game is enhanced by executing the effect that depresses the player's expectation. It becomes.

  Note that this example is merely an example, and is not limited thereto. For example, in the case of a similar short specific game, the variation mode and / or the variation mode not selected in the case of a short specific game are the same. May also be configured to have different production contents. In such a configuration, when the symbol variation (or effect) is executed in the variation mode selected only in the similar short specific game, the game is that the period of time-saving gaming state is relatively long. The person can be recognized (conversely, it may have a variation mode / effect content selected only in the short specific game).

(Modification 4 from the second embodiment)
In the second embodiment, after the special game is over, the game is always shifted to the probability variation gaming state with a limited number of times, and the effect of the game is switched by stepping the effects during the period of the probability variation gaming state. Configured to improve. However, in the configuration of the second embodiment, the player's expectation cannot be expressed in terms of whether or not to shift to the probability variation gaming state depending on the jackpot symbol. Therefore, a configuration for solving such a problem is a fourth modification from the second embodiment, and only changes from the second embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 54 is a flowchart of the special game control process according to the subroutine of Step 1700 in FIG. 5 in Modification 4 of the second embodiment. First, the difference from the present embodiment is step 1711 (second variation 4) and step 1900 (second variation 4). The purpose of the game is the distribution game (the second big prize opening C20 having a specific area). (Unit game to be released) can be executed. That is, in step 1711 (second variation 4), the special game execution means MP33 determines whether or not the currently executed round is a distributed game execution round (in this example, 2R, 4R). In the case of Yes in step 1711 (second variation 4), in step 1900 (second variation 4), the allocated game execution control means MP36 executes an allocated game execution process to be described later, and proceeds to step 1734. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1711 (second variation 4), the process proceeds to step 1712 and the same processing as in this embodiment is executed. Although not particularly shown in this example, in the gaming machine according to the modification example 4 of the second embodiment, the round in which the distribution game is executed is the second R and the fourth R, so if any of the symbols is a big hit Even so, the minimum number of rounds in the special game is set to 4 rounds so that any of the distributed game execution rounds (second and fourth R) can be executed (there is a distribution game that is not executed). It is preferable to configure such that a special game having the number of rounds is not set.

  Next, FIG. 55 is a flowchart of the distribution game execution process according to the subroutine of Step 1900 (second variation 4) of FIG. 54 in Modification 4 of the second embodiment. First, at step 1902, the allocated game execution control means MP36 refers to the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and determines whether the allocated game execution flag is on. If Yes in step 1902, the process proceeds to step 1916. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1902, in step 1904, the distribution game execution control means MP36 refers to the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and the main game symbol that is stopped is the long open symbol (5A / 5B. 7A, 7B). In the case of Yes in Step 1904, in Step 1906, the distribution game execution control means MP36 uses a long open pattern (for example, 15 seconds open) as the open pattern of the second big prize opening C20 having the specific area C22. Then, an opening pattern designed so as to definitely enter the specific area C22 is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1910. On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1904 (that is, when the stopped main game symbol is 3A / 3B), in Step 1908, the allocated game execution control means MP36 is the second large game having the specific area C22. As an opening pattern of the winning opening C20, a short opening pattern (for example, an opening pattern that is open for 0.1 second and designed so that non-entry into the specific area C22 is definite) Is set and the process proceeds to step 1910.

  Next, at step 1910, the allocated game execution control means MP36 clears the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c. Next, at step 1912, the allocated game execution control means MP36 turns on the allocated game continuation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1914, the distribution game execution control means MP36 opens the second big prize opening C20 with the set release pattern, and the process proceeds to step 1916.

  Next, at step 1916, the allocation game execution control means MP36 confirms the counter value of the winning ball counter MP33c and determines whether or not a predetermined number (10) of gaming balls have won the second big winning opening C20. To do. If Yes in step 1916, the process proceeds to step 1920. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1916, in step 1918, the allocation game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not the opening period (the set opening pattern) of the second big prize opening C20 has ended. If Yes in step 1918, the process proceeds to step 1920. Next, at step 1920, the distribution game execution control means MP36 closes the second big prize opening C20. Next, at step 1922, the assigned game execution control means MP36 turns off the assigned game execution flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b. Next, in step 1924, the allocated game execution control means MP36 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the specific area C22 in the allocated game execution round. In the case of Yes in step 1924, in step 1926, the distribution game execution control means MP36 turns on the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the special game related information temporary storage means MB20b, and proceeds to step 1928. . Also in the case of No in step 1924, the process proceeds to step 1928. Next, at step 1928, the allocated game execution control means MP36 adds 1 to the round number counter (ends the allocated game execution round), and proceeds to the next process (the process at step 1734). Even in the case of No in step 1918, the processing shifts to the next processing (processing in step 1734).

  Next, FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the gaming state determination process after the end of the special game according to the subroutine of Step 1750 in FIG. 20 in Modification Example 4 of the second embodiment. The difference from the second embodiment is about step 1788 (second variation 4), step 1789 (second variation 4), step 1790 (second variation 4), and step 1792 (second variation 4). The purpose is to change the possibility of transition to the probability-variable gaming state and the upper limit of the number of times of variation in the time-reduced gaming state depending on whether or not there is a ball entering the specific area C22 in the sorting game executed in the second embodiment. It is to let you. That is, in step 1788 (second variable 4), the specific game control means MP50 refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b and determines whether or not the main game probability change transition reservation flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1788 (second variation 4), in step 1789 (second variation 4), the specific game control means MP50 determines the main game probability change transition reservation flag in the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b. And turn to step 1754. On the other hand, after setting a specific game start command (command to the sub-side) in step 1763 (second), in step 1790 (second variation 4), the specific game control means MP50 counts the limited frequency counter MN52c a predetermined number of times. (80 times in this example) is set, and the process proceeds to step 1778.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1788 (second variation 4), in step 1792 (second variation 4), the specific game control means MP50 counts the predetermined number of times (in this example, 50 times) in the time-count counter MP52c. (But not limited to this) is set, and the process proceeds to Step 1778. As described above, in the fourth modification from the second embodiment, when no game ball is detected in the specific area C22 during execution of the special game, the limited frequency A flag is not turned on, and the limited frequency state It is configured that the number of time reductions is different from that in the case where the game ball is not transferred to the probability change game state and the game ball is detected in the specific area C22. Further, the different short time count (“80−50 = 30 times”) has the same value as the number of fluctuations staying in the first stage (30 times).

  As described above, according to Modification 4 from the second embodiment, whether or not to enter the probability-variable gaming state after execution of the special game, depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the specific area during the special game. In a game machine (a so-called tamagyo type gaming machine) that determines (changes to a probability-variable gaming state without entering a ball and does not transition to a probability-changing gaming state without entering a ball) By changing the variation mode (and production) during the non-stochastic variation gaming state and the time-reduced gaming state in the case of the absence from the variation mode (and production) during the probability variation gaming state, according to the player's profit mode, Appropriate performance can be executed. Although not specifically shown in the present example, when executing the distribution game, a dedicated effect (the effect of inquiring whether or not the second big prize opening C20 is long open, the entry to the specific area C22) It may be configured to execute an effect of inciting whether or not a ball is made, an effect of notifying that a specific area C22 has been entered, etc. {the execution mode is not particularly limited, In the case of the effect of notifying that the entry into the specific area C22 has been made, at the timing (desirably immediately after) that the entry has been made, the effect display device SG and the effect display device SG It can be exemplified that the notification is performed by a production device (for example, a so-called production movable body accessory or a light guide plate) provided on the front surface (for example, on the production display device SG). Display an image labeled “V” or The movable body role of use displacing the effect possible positions from the initial position, or to highlight an image on the light guide plate by irradiating light to the light guide plate, etc.)}.

  Further, in the fourth modification from the second embodiment, there are a plurality of open modes (for example, two types) in the unit game (round) in which the second big prize opening is in an open state. Specifically, although not particularly illustrated, a first unit game that can be opened for a first time (preferably less than or less than one launch interval of game balls) and a predetermined time after the first time is released. A second unit game that can be reopened (or opened and closed) for a second time longer than the first time after a time closure. In this way, by configuring the first unit game and the second unit game to be executable, even after the opening operation of the first time with low expectation for transition to the probability variation is finished, the probability There is a possibility that the opening operation of the second time with high expectation to the change transition is executed. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the special game. The second time is preferably equal to or longer than one game ball launch interval in order to ensure that a player enters a specific area, and is (half the maximum number of winnings in the round) × (game It is more preferable that it is equal to or greater than or equal to or greater than (one launch interval of balls), and it is particularly preferable to be equal to or greater than (the upper limit winning number of the round) × (one launch interval of game balls).

  Further, in the gaming machine according to Modification 4 from the second embodiment to the second embodiment, the limited frequency table of three levels ("first level → second level → third level") at the limited frequency A. As an example of changing the execution mode of the prefetch effect (or prefetch lottery) in such a configuration, (1) there is a dedicated prefetch effect at each stage, (2 ) There is a common pre-reading effect in a plurality of stages, (3) the frequency of occurrence of a pre-reading effect is reduced compared to other stages in any stage, (4) one or more stages (for example, two stages) For example, the prefetch lottery can be executed in the first stage, but the prefetch lottery is not executed in other stages (for example, the first stage or the third stage). Moreover, it may be configured such that the execution mode of the prefetch effect (or prefetch lottery) can be different depending on the stop symbol (determined stop symbol) related to the hold subject to the prefetch lottery, and the prefetch effect in such a configuration As an execution mode of (or pre-reading lottery), (A) the pre-reading effect (or pre-reading lottery) of (1) to (3) described above is performed only when the stop symbol is “HF”. B) Prefetch lottery can be executed only when the stop symbol is “HF”. (C) When the stop symbol is “HF”, the probability is higher than when the stop symbol is “HD” or “HE”. The pre-read lottery is executed (or it is easy to win the pre-read lottery).

  Moreover, you may comprise so that the effect which generate | occur | produces in one step may generate | occur | produce also when it is not a limited frequency state.

  Further, in the gaming machine according to the modification 4 from the second embodiment to the second embodiment, when the stay stage is switched from the stay stage to the next stage, the final change of the stay stage where the stay is made Further, it may be configured such that a dedicated effect at the time of stay stage switching (an effect suggesting that the stage is switched) can be executed. In the case of such a configuration, it is desirable to refer to a dedicated table (stage switching table) at the time of change when the effect is executed, and to ensure that the change time for executing the effect is secured. In addition, in the final variation of the stay stage, a dedicated variation mode may be selected only at the time of a loss, and a normal hit effect in the stay stage may be executed at the time of hitting. Therefore, it is easy for a player who sees the production for the first time to understand the change of the production, and for a player who is familiar with the production, the result of the final change in which the stay stage changes can be predicted. Interesting will increase. In addition, using the fact that the stay stage final variation becomes a dedicated variation pattern, even when the final variation of the stay stage is a big hit, an effect substantially the same as the stage switching effect is executed, and after the effect ( Alternatively, it may be configured such that an effect that is a big hit can be executed in the middle).

(Third embodiment)
In addition, in this embodiment, although it comprised so that an effect could be performed during the variation time of the main game symbol determined with reference to the variation mode determination lottery table, the period during which the effect can be performed is not limited to this. . Therefore, a configuration in which an effect can be executed at times other than during the variation time of the main game symbol determined with reference to the variation mode determination lottery table is described as the third embodiment, and only differences from the present embodiment will be described in detail below. Describe.

  First, FIG. 57 is a flowchart of the first (second) main game symbol display process according to the subroutine of steps 1400 (1) and (2) of FIG. 9 in the third embodiment. The differences from this embodiment are step 1930 (third), step 1950 (third), and step 1443 (third) to step 1447 (third), the purpose of which is a so-called variable fixed time (main game). Although the symbol is definitely stopped and displayed, it is a period during which the new symbol change does not start, and it is time to make it easier to recognize the type of the main game symbol that is definitely stopped and displayed) It is to provide. Note that in the third embodiment, a condition “not in the fixed fluctuation time” is added as the fluctuation start condition of the main game symbol.

  First, after execution of the processing of step 1450, step 1500, or step 1416, in step 1930 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C executes variable additional information control processing described later. Next, in step 1950 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C executes variable fixed time determination processing described later, and proceeds to step 1418. Thus, in this example, the variation fixed time related to the variation is determined when the variation start condition related to the variation of the main game symbol is satisfied. On the other hand, after the changing flag is turned off in step 1434, in step 1444 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines the change determined in step 1950 (third). The fixed time is set in the variable fixed time timer MP12t and the timer is started. Next, in step 1445 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is in the fixed fixed state in the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The flag is turned on, and the process proceeds to step 1446 (third).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1426, in step 1443 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is the flag area of the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. , It is determined whether or not the fixed fluctuation flag is ON. If Yes in step 1443 (third), the process proceeds to step 1446 (third), and if No, the process proceeds to the next process (process in step 1600).

  Next, in step 1446 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the variable fixed time timer MP12t and determines whether or not the timer value is zero. In the case of Yes in step 1446 (third), in step 1447 (third), the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C stores the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C. The variable fixed flag in the flag area is turned off, and the process proceeds to step 1436. Note that if the answer is No in step 1446 (third), the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 1600).

  Next, FIG. 58 is a flowchart of the variable addition time control process according to the subroutine of Step 1930 (third) in FIG. 57 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1931, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game probability change flag is off and the main game short time flag is off. It is determined whether or not there is. In the case of Yes in step 1931, in step 1932, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the change symbol of the change It is determined whether or not it is an additional jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol to which variable addition time can be added, in this example, 3A, 4A, 5A). If Yes in step 1932, the process proceeds to step 1938.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1932, in step 1933, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and It is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol (in this example, 1K · 2K). If Yes in step 1933, the process proceeds to step 1938. If No, the process proceeds to the next process {process in step 1950 (third)}.

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1931, in step 1934, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b, and the main game probability change flag is ON and It is determined whether or not the main game short time flag is off. In the case of Yes in Step 1934, in Step 1935, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the change symbol of the change Determines whether or not the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example). If Yes in step 1935, the process proceeds to step 1938. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1935, in step 1936, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and It is determined whether or not the stop symbol is a small hit symbol (in this example, 1K · 2K). If Yes in step 1936, the process proceeds to step 1938. On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1936, the process proceeds to the next process {step 1950 (third) process} (the variation addition time is not added even when the variation stop symbol is 4A or 5A).

  Next, in step 1938, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C adds the variation addition time (when a predetermined condition is satisfied) to the variation time of the variation determined in step 1450 or step 1416. In this example, 20 seconds) is added to the determined variation time. Next, in step 1940, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the stop symbol of the fluctuation is a predetermined big hit. It is determined whether or not the symbol (a jackpot symbol that can be transferred to the awakening stage, which is 4A / 5A in this example). In the case of Yes in Step 1940, in Step 1942, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C is an awakening stage transition notifying effect execution command (awakening which is an effect of notifying the player that the state will shift to the awakening stage). A command for executing a stage transition notification effect) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and the next process {process in step 1950 (third)} Migrate to On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1940, that is, in the case where the stop symbol of the fluctuation is the latent probability variation big hit symbol (3A in this example) or the small hit symbol (1K · 2K), in step 1944, the first and second main The game symbol control means MP11-C sets a devil stage transition notification effect execution command (command for executing a devil stage transition notification effect which is an effect of notifying the player that the devil stage is to be shifted) (step 2999). In the display command transmission control process, it is transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side), and the process proceeds to the next process {process of Step 1950 (third)}.

  In this example, in step 1944, the devil stage transition notification effect is configured to be executed when the variation stop symbol is “3A”. However, in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, When the change stop symbol is “3A”, after the special game related to “3A” is finished, the game moves to the “probability change stage” in order to shift to the probability change game state and the time reduction game state. You may comprise so that the effect to alert | report may be performed. In addition, even when the variation stop symbol becomes “3A” in the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening gaming state, the probability variation gaming state and the non-time shortening after the special game related to the “3A” is completed. You may comprise so that it may transfer to a gaming state. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may transfer to a non-time-reduced game state after completion | finish of the special game which concerns on a "4A" and a "5A" symbol.

  Next, FIG. 59 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third) in FIG. 57 in the third embodiment. First, in step 1952, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the variation relates to the first main game side. It is determined whether or not it is a fluctuation. In the case of Yes in step 1952, in step 1956, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C and stops the change of the change. It is determined whether or not “HB”. In the case of Yes in step 1956, in step 1958, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to the first long time (the long time of the fluctuations relating to the first main game). And in this example, 1.1 seconds), and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1956, in step 1960, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to the first short time (short of the fluctuations related to the first main game). This is a variable fixed time, which is time, and is 0.8 seconds in this example), and proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1952, in step 1962, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the variation fixed time of the variation to the second time (the variation fixed time related to the second main game). In this example, 0.5 second) is determined, and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is an execution image diagram of the fluctuation fixed time effect. As shown in the figure, in this example, an effect that can be executed during the variable fixed time is configured to be executable only when the variable fixed time can be secured for the time value of the first long time (1.1 seconds). (Since 1.1 seconds of production is performed). Therefore, the effect during the variable fixed time is executed only when the variable fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), and the variable fixed time is the first short time (0.8 seconds) or the second time ( (0.5 seconds), the effect is not executed after the change stop timing of the decorative symbol in the change (the effect is not executed during the change fixed time). Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of effects with different execution times executed during the fixed variation time may be provided, and the execution of the plurality of effects may be determined based on the determined fixed variable time.

  In this example, there are two types of variable fixed time on the first main game side, “1.1 seconds” and “0.8 seconds”, and the variable fixed time on the second main game side. Is provided with one type of “0.5 seconds”, and the variable fixed time on the second main game side is the shortest. In this example, the time value from the start of the change to the start of the next change, which is the sum of the change time that can be determined and the change fixed time, is the time value on the first main game side and the time on the second main game side. It is configured not to be equivalent to the value. Although not shown, the variation mode and the production mode are configured to be different when the variation fixing time is different between the two variations. Moreover, only when the change symbol of the change is “HB”, the change fixed time on the first main game side is configured to be the first long time (1.1 seconds), and the change time in that case is It is likely to be long (when the main game short flag is off, only the fluctuation time of 30 seconds or more is selected) (because it can be selected only in the case of HB), the fluctuation time is long. In this case, the background effect is “normal background → reach background → normal background”, and the effect for shifting from the reach background to the normal background is executed in the variable fixed time (1.1 seconds). . In addition, when the fluctuation fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the time during which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the normal background, compared to the case where it is the first short time (0.8 seconds). However, it may be configured to be relatively short. For example, (1) When the fixed fluctuation time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the decorative design temporarily stops during the reach background. However, in the case of the first short time (0.8 seconds), there is a time during which the decorative design is temporarily stopped during the normal background. (2) When the fixed fluctuation time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the time during which the decorative design in the normal background after the reach background is temporarily stopped is 0.1 second, In the case of one short time (0.8 seconds), the time during which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the normal background is 0.4 seconds. (3) When the fluctuation fixed time is the first long time (1.1 seconds), the time during which the decorative symbol in the normal background after the reach background is temporarily stopped and the fluctuation fixed time are the first short time (0 .8 seconds), the time during which the decorative design in the normal background after the reach background is temporarily stopped may be the same time.

  Next, FIG. 60 is a flowchart of decorative symbol display content determination processing according to the subroutine of Step 2300 in FIG. 5 in the third embodiment. The difference from this embodiment is Step 2700 (third). That is, after determining the stop symbol and the variation mode of the decorative symbol in step 2306, in step 2700 (third), the drawing display content determination means SM21n executes an effect content determination process during additional time, which will be described later, 2308 is entered.

  Next, FIG. 61 is a flowchart of effect content determination processing during additional time according to the subroutine of Step 2700 (third) in FIG. 60 in the third embodiment. First, in step 2702, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main side information temporary storage means SM11b, and determines whether or not an awakening stage transition notification effect execution command has been received from the main side. In the case of Yes in step 2702, in step 2704, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is executed during the added time effect {added fluctuation added time (in this example, the second half of the time related to fluctuation is 20 seconds). Set as the awakening stage transition notification effect (the effect of notifying the transition to the awakening stage) (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process of step 2999), and then The process proceeds to (the process of step 2308). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 2702, in step 2706, the drawing display content determination means SM21n refers to the main-side information temporary storage means SM11b and has received a devil stage transition notification effect execution command from the main side. Determine whether. In the case of Yes in step 2706, in step 2708, the drawing display content determination means SM21n is executed during the additional time effect {added fluctuation additional time (in this example, the second half of the time related to fluctuation is 20 seconds). As the effect}, a devil stage transition notification effect (an effect for notifying the transition to the devil stage) is set (transmitted to the sub-sub control unit SS side in the display command transmission control process in step 2999), and then The process proceeds to (the process of step 2308). Note that, also in the case of No in step 2706, the processing proceeds to the next processing (processing in step 2308).

  Here, the lower part of the figure is a transition stage notification effect image diagram. In the figure, the change is illustrated in which 20 seconds is added as the change addition time after the change time is determined to be 60 seconds. As shown in the figure, the decorative symbol variation starts, and after 60 seconds, the button challenge symbol (“SE” symbol) stops as a decorative symbol stop symbol in the middle row. Immediately after that, an effect that prompts the user to press the sub input button SB is displayed (in this example, a continuous hit effect). Based on the big hit symbol (or small hit symbol), either the awakening stage transition notification effect or the devil stage transition notification effect Execute. It should be noted that after executing the awakening stage transition notification effect, the process shifts to the awakening stage, after executing the devil stage transition notification effect, shifts to the devil stage, and notifies the current gaming state after the stay stage ends. In addition, the greater the number of fluctuations staying in the awakening stage and the devil stage, the higher the possibility of being in the probability fluctuation gaming state (the possibility of being in the non-stochastic fluctuation gaming state is reduced). . In addition, in a configuration in which a variation addition time is not provided, as an effect mode when executing an effect for transitioning to the awakening stage or the devil stage, (1) an opportunity chance (for example, even-numbered unevenness such as 246) during the change (2) After the decorative design stops, the effect when the decorative design is stopped is not visible along with the effect that the glass of the background effect or decorative design is broken. (3) No button execution effect is performed, for example, such as an awakening stage or an devil stage).

  By configuring as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, it is configured such that a variation addition time can be added after the variation mode of the main game symbol is determined, and the time value is determined under a predetermined condition. By providing a plurality of variable fixed times that can be different and providing effects dedicated to the variable addition time and the variable fixed time, the fun of the game is enhanced.

(Modification 1 from the third embodiment)
In the third embodiment, the variable fixed time can be different depending on whether the fluctuation is related to the first main game side and the type of stop symbol related to the loss. However, the variable fixed time is determined. The conditions are not limited to this. Therefore, such a configuration is referred to as a first modification from the third embodiment, and only the changes from the third embodiment will be described in detail below.

  First, FIG. 62 is a flowchart of variable fixed time determination processing according to the subroutine of step 1950 (third variation 1) in FIG. 57 in Modification 1 from the third embodiment. First, in step 1964, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the flag area of the specific game related information temporary storage means MB30b to determine whether or not the main game short time flag is on. . In the case of Yes in step 1964, in step 1966, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and holds the second main game hold. It is determined whether or not there is a hold in which the variation mode group becomes group C. In the case of Yes in Step 1966, in Step 1967, the first / second main game symbol control means MP11-C executes a fixed time change lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10). Next, in step 1968, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the lottery result and determines whether or not the lottery is won. In the case of Yes in Step 1968, in Step 1970, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation as a specific time (3 seconds in this example), and performs the following processing The process proceeds to (Step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1966 or step 1968, in step 1971, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to the short time and short time (in this example, 0.5 seconds). ) And the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418).

  On the other hand, in the case of No in step 1964, in step 1972, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the first and second main game symbol information temporary storage means MB11b-C, and the first main game symbol information storage means MB11b-C. It is determined whether or not there is a hold in which the variation mode group becomes group 3 in the game hold. In the case of Yes in Step 1972, in Step 1973, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C executes a fixed time change lottery to win with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/5) (time shortening gaming state) In comparison with the non-time-reduced game state, the variation time is relatively short, so the fixed fixed time is long. Higher in the case of state). Next, in step 1974, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C refers to the lottery result and determines whether or not the lottery is won. In the case of Yes in Step 1974, in Step 1976, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C determines the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation as a specific time (3 seconds in this example), and performs the following processing The process proceeds to (Step 1418). On the other hand, in the case of No in Step 1972 or Step 1974, in Step 1978, the first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C sets the fluctuation fixed time of the fluctuation to a non-short time and short time (0.8 in this example). Second) and the process proceeds to the next process (the process of step 1418).

  In this way, in this example, the variable fixed time is configured to vary depending on the gaming state, and the selection probability also varies depending on the gaming state for a specific variable fixed time (specific time, which is 3 seconds in this example). It is configured. In addition, when the fixed-time change lottery is won, all the fixed fixed times before the change related to the hold that triggered the lottery are specified times (3 seconds in this example) (or high probability) The specific time may be used). In addition, when the fixed time change lottery is won, all the fixed fixed times before the change related to the holding that has been the trigger for executing the lottery may be short (for example, 0.1 seconds) (or high Probability may be short.) With such a configuration, it is possible to shorten the time until the start of the change related to the hold that has been the trigger for the lottery.

  In addition, although not shown, the effects executed during the fixed time of the specific time are the movie effects (effects for displaying moving images) and freeze effects (images suddenly darkened on the effect display device SG). It is desirable to execute such an effect that the player has a sense of expectation that there will be a big hit in the hold.

  With the configuration as described above, in the gaming machine according to the third embodiment, when the specific variation mode group is determined, the configuration allows the player to change the fixed fixed time as the specific time. By recognizing that the fixed time is a specific time, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that there is a hold with a high expectation degree in jackpot, and the interest of the game is enhanced.

  Also, in this example, the variation time is determined by dividing into two blocks, the A block that is the period before the reach variation and the B block that is the period after the reach variation. A variation may be formed by adding a variation addition time and / or a variation fixed time.

  Further, in this example, the variable fixed time is set to a long time (the same time as the variable time to reach, for example, 30 seconds), and the reach effect can be executed during the variable fixed time. May be. Further, it may be configured such that the reach effect is executed in the change time and the pseudo reach effect is executed in the change time, where the change time is less than the change fixed time. For example, the variation fixed time is set to 90 seconds, the variation time is set to 60 seconds, and the stop symbol of the decorative symbol related to the variation time is set to “123” which is a special stop combination (the above-mentioned chance chance) (“4 × 4”). The left column and the right column may be the same stop symbol, and the middle column stop symbol may be a special symbol.) After that, in order to determine whether the fluctuation is a big hit or a loss After that, the effect that the decoration symbol stop symbol becomes “444” is executed.

  Moreover, in this example, it may be configured such that the shorter the fixed number of suspensions, the easier it is to select the short fixed time as the variable fixed time.

  In addition, in this example, when the hold is generated, the result of the hold, the stop symbol, the change mode group, and the change mode random number delimiter information can be transmitted to the sub side. Even when the game state is different between the time and the digestion of the hold that has occurred, it is possible to determine whether or not the result or the variation mode group is the same (whether or not different). Therefore, even when the game result is different between the occurrence of the hold and the digestion of the generated hold when the result of the determination and the variation mode group are the same, even if the prefetch effect is executed across the game state Alternatively, depending on the type of the prefetching effect to be executed, there may be a case where the prefetching effect is executed across the gaming state and a case where it is not executed.

  Further, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects may be provided, and a pre-reading effect that can be executed depending on the trigger suspension variation mode and a prefetch effect that can be executed regardless of the trigger suspension variation mode may be provided. In addition, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be generated at the same time, a plurality of pre-reading effects may be started at the same time when the pre-reading effects are started, and another pre-reading effect is started during the execution of one pre-reading effect. You may comprise. In addition, the timing of the pre-reading effect rank-up (for example, the expectation level of the big hit is increased, for example, when the hold display color is changed from “blue to red”) may be executed at the same time. It may be configured to up. A plurality of types of prefetching effects may be provided, for example, prefetching effects in which the on-hold display mode changes, chances of prefetching effects that suggest a big hit expectation degree in the stop appearance of decorative symbols (combination of stop symbols), background A change look-ahead effect, a countdown notice look-ahead effect, etc. may be provided. In addition, the plurality of pre-reading effects are the types or combinations of pre-reading effects that can occur at the same time, the rank-up degree when any of them occurs (1 step UP, 2 steps UP, not UP), and the display mode that appears first. The jackpot expectation, etc. may be configured to be different depending on the symbols scheduled to be stopped related to the hold that triggered the prefetch lottery. For example, when performing the prefetch effect related to “HC”, the prefetch related to “HB” There may be more types or combinations of pre-reading effects that can occur at the same time than when the effects are performed, the degree of rank increase is high when any of them occurs, and a display mode with a high expectation level is likely to appear first, etc. .

  In this example, the pre-read lottery is not executed when there is a trigger hold in the hold. However, the condition for not executing the pre-read lot is not limited to this. It may be configured not to execute the prefetch lottery when there is a hold that becomes a change (a change of the main game symbol that will execute the reach effect).

  As a configuration of the gaming machine according to the present example, the main game symbol is changed once, after “temporary stop display of left / middle / right symbols → re-change (so-called pseudo change)” is repeated a plurality of times. By stopping the game symbol, it is possible to execute pseudo-continuous variation, which is an effect technique that shows the player as if the main game symbol fluctuates multiple times during one variation of the main game symbol. May be. In addition, in such a configuration, during execution of the pre-reading effect, as a changing effect related to the hold that is digested before the trigger hold, the pseudo continuous change is not executed, and the changing effect related to the trigger hold is You may comprise so that a pseudo | simulation continuous variation can be performed.

(Summary)
The following concepts can be extracted (listed) based on the configuration shown in the above embodiments. However, the concepts listed below are merely examples, and the concepts based on the further configurations shown in the above embodiments are added to these concepts as well as the combination and separation (higher level conceptualization) of these listed concepts. May be.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (1)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
First game content determination means (e.g., game content determination) that determines whether the first identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination, and the first identification information change display mode is executed based on the first random number. Means MN),
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination) that determines whether or not the second identification information is stopped based on the second random number and determines whether the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination. Means MN),
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning is the stop of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the variable display period of the first identification information in the information stop display mode B is likely to be relatively long.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (2)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning is the stop of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold On the other hand, depending on the number of first suspensions remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may differ,
If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold Regardless of the number of first suspensions remaining when the variable display start condition for the first identification information is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information is configured to be uniform. This is a pachinko machine characterized by

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (3)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning is the stop of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold On the other hand, depending on the number of first suspensions remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may differ,
If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold Regardless of the number of first suspensions remaining at the time the first identification information variable display start condition is satisfied, the average value related to the first identification information variable display period is configured to be uniform,
As a gaming state that depends on at least determining the variation display mode of the first identification information, a normal variation state and a specific variation state in which the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information is different compared to the normal variation state. Have
In the normal variation state, when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning, While the average value concerning the variable display period of the first identification information may be different according to the number of first holds remaining when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first hold is satisfied In the normal variation state, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information stop display mode becomes the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning The average value for the variable display period of the first identification information is uniform regardless of the number of first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition for the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied. ,
In a specific variation state, when the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning, The average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information is uniform regardless of the number of first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied. In the specific variation state, when the first identification information stop display mode becomes the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning when the variation display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied. The average value for the variable display period of the first identification information is uniform regardless of the number of first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied. Configured to be A pachinko game machine, wherein the door.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (4)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning is the stop of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning More than the number of types related to the display mode,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold On the other hand, depending on the number of first suspensions remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may differ,
If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold Regardless of the number of first suspensions remaining at the time the first identification information variable display start condition is satisfied, the average value related to the first identification information variable display period is configured to be uniform,
After the occurrence of a certain first hold, before fulfilling the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold, the game holds the hold prefetch information indicating the existence of the certain first hold to the player. Suggestion or notification to the person in advance,
First identification information variable display when the first identification information stop display mode becomes the first identification information stop display mode A when not winning when the first identification information variable display start condition for a certain first hold is satisfied As a group according to the mode, the variation display mode of the first identification information is a predetermined type according to the number of first suspensions remaining at the time when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first suspension is satisfied. 1st identification information stop display mode A corresponding group 1 at the time of non-winning that can change whether or not it is selected from within, and remaining when satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A corresponding group 2 in which it is definite that the variation display mode of the first identification information is selected from among the specific types, regardless of the number of the first holds. Have
The first identification information variable display when the first identification information stop display mode becomes the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information regarding a certain first hold is satisfied In the aspect, the variation display mode of the first identification information is within the specified type regardless of the number of first suspensions remaining at the time when the variation display start condition of the first identification information regarding the certain first suspension is satisfied. To be selected is deterministic,
After satisfying the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold before the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied after the occurrence of the certain first hold The pre-determined stop display mode of the first identification information scheduled in the case of the non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and the case of the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B In this case, the pachinko gaming machine is configured to have different conditions for suggesting or informing the player of the reserved prefetch information in advance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (5)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, and the second identification when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types related to the stop display mode of information is also plural,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning B and at least a non-winning first identification information stop display mode C,
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode C is configured so as to be relatively long.
Non-winning second identification information stop display mode A and non-winning second identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning B and non-winning second identification information stop display mode C at least,
The game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) includes a non-open easy state and an easy open state in which the variable member is more likely to open than the non-open easy state. And
In the non-open easy state, when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning, the stop display mode of the first identification information is the first identification information at the time of non-winning Depending on whether the stop display mode B and the stop display mode of the first identification information become the first identification information stop display mode C at the time of non-winning, the variable display mode of the first identification information Has a different selection trend,
In the easy opening state, when the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop. Depending on whether the display mode B and the stop display mode of the second identification information become the second identification information stop display mode C at the time of non-winning, the variation display mode of the second identification information The selection tendency is different,
In the non-open easy state, when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning, the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second identification information at the time of non-winning Regardless of whether it is the stop display mode B or the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode C, the variable display mode of the second identification information The selection tendency of the change display mode of the second identification information according to whether the selection tendency is the same or which is the same is not relatively different from the case of being in the easy-to-open state,
In configuring so that the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information is different,
If the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the certain first hold On the other hand, depending on the number of first suspensions remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the average value related to the variable display period of the first identification information may differ,
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode B when not winning or the first identification information stop display mode when not winning In the case of C, regardless of the number of first holds remaining at the time when the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to the certain first hold is satisfied, the change is related to the change display period of the first identification information. The average value becomes uniform,
In configuring so that the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different,
When the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the second identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the certain second hold On the other hand, the average value related to the variable display period of the second identification information may differ according to the number of second suspensions remaining when the variable display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied,
The second identification information stop display mode is the second identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning or the second identification information stop display mode at the time of non-winning when the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied In the case of C, regardless of the number of second hold remaining when the change display start condition of the second identification information related to the certain second hold is satisfied, the change is related to the change display period of the second identification information. It is configured so that the average value is uniform,
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning. The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode C is configured to be relatively long, and the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second when not winning. The second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information becomes the second identification information stop display mode C at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the second identification information in the case of the identification information stop display mode B The variable display period is configured to be relatively long,
When the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, the stop display mode of the first identification information is the first identification information stop display mode B when not winning than the first identification information stop display mode A when not winning. It is difficult and is configured to be less likely to become the first identification information stop display mode C at the time of non-winning than the first identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning,
When the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning, the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B rather than the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A. The pachinko gaming machine is configured so that it is difficult and is less likely to become the second identification information stop display mode C when not winning than the second identification information stop display mode B when not winning.
In addition, the selection tendency in the above includes those derived from a variation pattern and those derived from the number of reserves. When derived from a variation pattern, the selected variation pattern, type, etc. are different, while when derived from the number of reservations, it depends on whether or not it depends on the number of remaining reservations at the time of suspension digestion. Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (6)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the identification information;
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the suspension occurs. Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30);
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the determination result A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the winning / failing determination result based on the random number is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game to be obtained,
As the type related to the stop display mode of identification information when the determination result based on the random number is non-winning, it has at least a non-winning identification information stop display mode A and a non-winning identification information stop display mode B And
Identification when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B, compared to the variable information display period when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The variable information display period is configured to be relatively long,
Prior to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold after the occurrence of the certain hold, the pre-reading information indicating the presence of the certain hold to the player is suggested to the player in advance or Can be informed,
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold, the display of the identification information scheduled to be stopped when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied If the mode is determined in advance and the result of the determination in advance is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B, the pre-reading information can be suggested or notified to the player in advance. If the result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the reserved pre-read information is not suggested or notified to the player in advance, or the pre-judgment result is the non-winning identification information stop display. Compared with the case of the mode B, the pachinko gaming machine is configured so that the frequency of suggesting or informing the reserved pre-read information to the player in advance is relatively reduced. That.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (7)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g) capable of displaying the identification information;
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on a ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and control is performed so that the suspension occurs. Random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30);
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the determination result A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information is displayed in a variable manner on the identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), and then the identification information is stopped and displayed. Identification information display control means for controlling (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C);
After the winning / failing determination result based on the random number is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game to be obtained,
Non-winning identification information stop display mode A, non-winning identification information stop display mode B, and non-winning identification information as types related to the stop display mode of identification information when the determination result based on the random number is non-winning At least a stop display mode C,
Identification when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, compared to the variation display period of the identification information when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The variable information display period is configured to be relatively long,
If the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A when the identification information variable display start condition for a certain hold is satisfied, the first identification information variable display start condition for the certain hold While the average value for the variable information display period of the identification information may differ depending on the number of holds remaining at the time of satisfying
When the variable information display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, if the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the certain hold Regardless of the number of suspensions remaining at the time when the identification information fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, the average value related to the identification information fluctuation display period is configured to be uniform,
Prior to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold after the occurrence of the certain hold, the pre-reading information indicating the presence of the certain hold to the player is suggested to the player in advance or Can be informed,
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold, the display of the identification information scheduled to be stopped when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied A mode is preliminarily determined, and when the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the reservation pre-read information is suggested to the player in advance. Alternatively, on the other hand, if the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the reservation prefetch information is not suggested or notified to the player in advance, or the advance Compared with the case where the determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the frequency with which the reserved pre-read information is suggested or notified to the player in advance In the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B and the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to differ in frequency of suggesting or informing the player of the hold prefetch information in advance.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (8)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
First game content determination means (e.g., game content determination) that determines whether the first identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination, and the first identification information change display mode is executed based on the first random number. Means MN),
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination) that determines whether or not the second identification information is stopped based on the second random number and determines whether the second identification information is stopped and displayed based on the result of the determination. Means MN),
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, and the second identification when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types related to the stop display mode of information is also plural,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
Non-winning second identification information stop display mode A and non-winning second identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning And at least B
The second identification information stop display mode is the second identification information at the time of non-winning than the variation display period of the second identification information when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning. The variable display period of the second identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
As a gaming state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member, it has a non-open easy state and an easy open state where the variable member is likely to be in an open state than the non-open easy state.
When it is in the non-open easy state than the variable display period of the second identification information when it is in the easy-to-open state and when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second identification information stop display mode B when not winning When the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode B, the variation display period of the second identification information is configured to be relatively short. It is a pachinko gaming machine that features it.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (9)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, and the second identification when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types related to the stop display mode of information is also plural,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
Non-winning second identification information stop display mode A and non-winning second identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning And at least B
The game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) includes a non-open easy state and an easy open state in which the variable member is more likely to open than the non-open easy state. And
In the non-open easy state, when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the first identification information stop display mode A when not winning, and when the stop display mode of the first identification information is first when not winning Depending on which of the cases when it becomes the identification information stop display mode B, the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information is different,
In the easy opening state, the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, and the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification. Depending on which is the information stop display mode B, the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different,
As a gaming state that depends on at least determining the variation display mode of the second identification information, the first variation state and the second variation in which the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different from the first variation state. And in a period in which the easy opening state is maintained, a transition of the gaming state from the first variation state to the second variation state can occur,
The selection tendency of the variable display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning in the case of the easy opening state and the first variable state The selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning in the case of the easy opening state and the second variation state Is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured differently.
In addition, the selection tendency in the above includes those derived from a variation pattern and those derived from the number of reserves. When derived from a variation pattern, the selected variation pattern, type, etc. are different, while when derived from the number of reservations, it depends on whether or not it depends on the number of remaining reservations at the time of suspension digestion. Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (10)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the first random number is acquired by the first random number acquisition unit (for example, the first main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-A), the acquired first random number is satisfied until the variable display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied. First random number temporary storage means (for example, hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing random numbers and controlling so that the first hold occurs;
When the variable display start condition of the first identification information related to a certain first hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the first random number related to the certain first reservation, and the first identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the first identification information;
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
When the second random number is acquired by the second random number acquisition unit (for example, the second main game random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ21-B), the acquired second random number is satisfied until the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied. A second random number temporary storage means (for example, a hold control means MJ30) for temporarily storing a random number and controlling the second hold to occur;
When the variable display start condition of the second identification information related to a certain second hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the second random number related to the certain second reservation, and the second identification information is stopped based on the result of the validity determination Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining the display mode and the variable display mode of the second identification information;
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
After the determination result based on the first random number is winning and the first identification information is stopped or displayed, or the determination result based on the second random number is winning and the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) advantageous to the player; With
The number of types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning, and the second identification when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning The number of types related to the stop display mode of information is also plural,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
Non-winning second identification information stop display mode A and non-winning second identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the second identification information when the determination result based on the second random number is non-winning And at least B
The second identification information stop display mode is the second identification information at the time of non-winning than the variation display period of the second identification information when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning. The variable display period of the second identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
The game state relating to the ease of opening of the variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) includes a non-open easy state and an easy open state in which the variable member is more likely to open than the non-open easy state. And
When it is in the non-open easy state than the variable display period of the second identification information when it is in the easy-to-open state and when the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second identification information stop display mode B when not winning The variation display period of the second identification information in the case where the stop display mode of the second identification information is the second identification information stop display mode B at the time of non-winning is configured to be relatively short.
In the non-open easy state, when the stop display mode of the first identification information is the first identification information stop display mode A when not winning, and when the stop display mode of the first identification information is first when not winning Depending on which of the cases when it becomes the identification information stop display mode B, the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information is different,
In the easy opening state, the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification information stop display mode A, and the second identification information stop display mode is the non-winning second identification. Depending on which is the information stop display mode B, the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different,
As a gaming state that depends on at least determining the variation display mode of the second identification information, the first variation state and the second variation in which the selection tendency of the variation display mode of the second identification information is different from the first variation state. And in a period in which the easy opening state is maintained, a transition of the gaming state from the first variation state to the second variation state can occur,
The selection tendency of the variable display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning in the case of the easy opening state and the first variable state The selection tendency of the variation display mode of the first identification information when the stop display mode of the first identification information becomes the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning in the case of the easy opening state and the second variation state Is a pachinko machine characterized by being configured differently.
In addition, the selection tendency in the above includes those derived from a variation pattern and those derived from the number of reserves. When derived from a variation pattern, the selected variation pattern, type, etc. are different, while when derived from the number of reservations, it depends on whether or not it depends on the number of remaining reservations at the time of suspension digestion. Either one may be adopted.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (11)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the first random number, and the first identification information stop display mode and the first identification information variation display mode based on the determination result First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
In the case where the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the validity determination is performed based on the second random number, and the second identification information stop display mode and the second identification information variation display mode based on the determination result Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
From the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed, the first identification information is maintained to be stopped and displayed for a predetermined period. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period during which the condition cannot be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is suspended for a specific period different from the predetermined period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. And a second identification information display fixed period that is a period during which the displayed state is maintained and the variable identification start condition of the second identification information cannot be newly satisfied within the specific period. It is configured as
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display control means (for example, the effect display control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). Production display control means SM20),
Production display contents displayed during variable display of the first identification information for which the first identification information display fixed period is provided, and variable display of the second identification information for which the second identification information display fixed period is provided. The pachinko gaming machine is characterized in that the content displayed in the display can be the same content displayed in the effect.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (12)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display unit capable of displaying the second identification information (for example, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the first random number, and the first identification information stop display mode and the first identification information variation display mode based on the determination result First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
In the case where the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the validity determination is performed based on the second random number, and the second identification information stop display mode and the second identification information variation display mode based on the determination result Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the two identification information,
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
From the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed, the first identification information is maintained to be stopped and displayed for a predetermined period. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period during which the condition cannot be newly satisfied, and the state where the second identification information is stopped and displayed for a specific period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. And a second identification information display fixed period that is a period during which the change display start condition of the second identification information cannot be newly satisfied within the specific period.
First identification information display fixed period provided when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning, and the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning The pachinko gaming machine is configured such that the first identification information display fixed period provided in the case of the information stop display mode B is different.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (13)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member that is attached to a predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start opening B10) and is displaceable to an open state and a closed state. , The game ball can enter the second main game start opening B10) or is easier to enter than the closed state, and when it is displaced to the closed state, the predetermined entrance (for example, the second main game start port) In B10), a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured so that the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter compared to the open state,
Variable prize opening (for example, first big prize opening C10, second big prize opening C20) that can take an open state and a closed state,
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the starting port;
Game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) that executes a determination of success / failure based on the random number, and determines a stop display mode of the identification information and a variation display mode of the identification information based on the determination result.
Identification information display control means (for example, second main game symbol display part B21g) for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display part in accordance with the determination by the game content determination means;
After the winning / failing determination result based on the random number is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed, the variable winning opening (for example, the first large winning opening C10 and the second large winning opening C20) is set in an advantageous state for the player. When the special game to be obtained can be executed and the stop display mode of the identification information is of a predetermined type, the predetermined prizes to the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) are determined. A first special game in which a unit game in which a variable winning slot (for example, the first big prize opening C10 and the second big prize opening C20) is in an open state is executed a plurality of times until there is a number of balls or a predetermined period elapses. , And when the stop display mode of the identification information is a specific type of mode different from the predetermined type of mode, for example, to a variable winning port (for example, the first big winning port C10, the second big winning port C20). There is a predetermined number of balls or a predetermined period Special game control means for executing a second special game (for example, for example) that can execute a unit game that can open the variable prize opening (for example, the first big prize opening C10, the second big prize opening C20) until the time elapses. Special game control means MP30),
Before and after the execution of the first special game, the winning determination result has a low-probability lottery state in which the winning determination result is won with a predetermined probability, and the winning-probability determination result has a high probability lottery state in which the winning determination result is higher than the predetermined probability. Controls the game state related to the low probability lottery state and the high probability lottery state, while the game state related to the low probability lottery state and the high probability lottery state changes before and after the execution of the second special game. Lottery state transition control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) for controlling not to,
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
As the execution contents of the first special game, either the first high profit special game with the expected number of winning balls being a predetermined number or the first low profit special game with the expected number of winning balls being less than the predetermined number is executed. Is possible,
When the stop display mode of the identification information is the first stop display mode among the predetermined types of modes, the high probability lottery state is entered after the first high profit special game is executed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is In the case of the second stop display mode among the predetermined type modes, the low probability lottery state is entered after the first low profit special game is executed, and the stop display mode of the identification information is included in the predetermined type mode. In the third stop display mode, the first low profit special game is executed and the high probability lottery state is set.
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section;
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display control means (for example, the effect display control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). Production display control means SM20),
After the special game is executed on the main game part (for example, the main control board M) side, it is possible to display the predetermined effect display content, and when the predetermined effect display content is displayed, the identification information From the time when the display is variably displayed to the time when it is stopped and displayed as one unit, the predetermined effect until the number of repetitions of the unit reaches the predetermined number of times after the predetermined effect display content is displayed. It is configured to display the display content continuously,
When the special game is executed on the side of the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) due to the stop display mode of the identification information being the first stop display mode, the main game unit (for example, the main control unit) When the special game is executed because the stop display mode of the identification information is the second stop display mode on the board M) side, the identification information is displayed on the main game part (for example, the main control board M) side. When the special game is executed because the stop display mode is the third stop display mode, and the stop display mode of the identification information is the main game unit (for example, the main control board M) side When a special game is executed due to a specific type of aspect, it is configured to be able to display the same effect display content as the predetermined effect display content in any case,
This is a numerical value that suggests or informs the period during which the predetermined effect display content is continuously displayed after the special game is executed on the main game portion (for example, the main control board M), and the numerical value is large. Indeed, after the special game is executed, a numerical value determined so as to increase the expectation to be in a high probability lottery state is configured as the predetermined number of times,
After the special game is executed on the main game unit (for example, main control board M) side, the number of repetitions of the unit has reached the predetermined number of times from the start of display of the predetermined effect display contents. Thereafter, the pachinko gaming machine is configured so as to definitely notify the player whether or not it is in a high-probability lottery state on the main gaming unit (for example, the main control board M) side. It is.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (14)
A first start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10) into which a game ball can enter;
A second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
A variable member attached to the second starting port (for example, the second main game starting port B10) and capable of being displaced in an open state and a closed state, and when displaced into the open state, the second starting port (for example, the second main port) A game ball can enter the main game start port B10) or can be easily entered as compared to the closed state. When the game ball is displaced to the closed state, the game ball enters the second start port (eg, the second main game start port B10) Is a variable member (for example, the second main game start opening electric accessory B11d) configured to be difficult to enter in comparison with the inaccessible or open state,
A first identification information display section (for example, a first main game symbol display section A21g) capable of displaying the first identification information;
A second identification information display part (for example, a second main game symbol display part B21g) capable of displaying the second identification information;
A main game unit (for example, a main control board M) for controlling the progress of the game;
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
First random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) for acquiring a first random number based on a ball entering the first start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10); ,
When the variation display start condition of the first identification information is satisfied, the validity determination is executed based on the first random number, and the first identification information stop display mode and the first identification information variation display mode based on the determination result First game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
In accordance with the determination by the first game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the first identification information is variably displayed on the first identification information display section (for example, the first main game symbol display section A21g), First identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display one identification information;
A second random number acquisition means (for example, a second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B) for acquiring a second random number based on the ball entering the second start opening (for example, the second main game start opening B10); ,
In the case where the variation display start condition of the second identification information is satisfied, the validity determination is performed based on the second random number, and the second identification information stop display mode and the second identification information variation display mode based on the determination result Second game content determination means (for example, game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the second game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the second identification information is variably displayed on the second identification information display section (for example, the second main game symbol display section B21g), and then the second Second identification information display control means (for example, first and second main game symbol control means MP11-C) for controlling to stop and display the second identification information;
Game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means) for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) to the side of the sub game section (for example, sub control board S) MT),
Non-winning first identification information stop display mode A and non-winning first identification information stop display mode as the types related to the stop display mode of the first identification information when the determination result based on the first random number is non-winning And at least B
The first identification information stop display mode is the first identification at the time of non-winning than the variable display period of the first identification information when the first identification information stop display mode is the first identification information stop display mode A at the time of non-winning The variable display period of the first identification information in the case of the information stop display mode B is configured to be relatively long.
From the time when the first identification information is stopped and displayed, the first identification information is maintained to be stopped and displayed for a predetermined period. The first identification information display fixed period, which is a period during which the condition cannot be newly satisfied, and the second identification information is suspended for a specific period different from the predetermined period from the time when the second identification information is stopped and displayed. A second identification information display fixed period, which is a period for maintaining the displayed state, and within which the change display start condition of the second identification information cannot be newly satisfied within the specific period. And
The first identification information display fixed period is at least one of the first period and the second period longer than the first period, and the first identification information display fixed period is the second identification information display fixed period. Configured to be relatively longer than the period,
The first identification information display fixed period when the first identification information stop display mode is the non-winning first identification information stop display mode B is configured to be able to take at least the second period,
Even if the variable display period of the first identification information and the variable display period of the second identification information are the same in the predetermined gaming state, the first identification information display fixed period and the second identification information display fixed period Are configured differently,
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, information transmission / reception control means SM40) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
Based on the game information received by the game information receiving means (for example, the information transmission / reception control means SM40), the effect display control means (for example, the effect display control means for controlling the effect display content displayed on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG)). Production display control means SM20),
When the first identification information display fixed period takes the first period and when the first identification information display fixed period takes the second period, the effects displayed within the first identification information display fixed period A pachinko gaming machine characterized in that the display content can be varied.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (15)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, a first main game symbol display unit A21g, a second main game symbol display unit B21g),
Random number acquisition means (for example, first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-A) that acquires a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, first main game start opening A10, second main game start opening B10) , Second main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B),
When the random number is acquired by the random number acquisition means, the acquired random number is temporarily stored until the change display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and the random number temporary storage means (first and second) for controlling the hold to occur Main game state temporary storage means MB10-C),
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the determination result A game content determination means (for example, a game content determination means MN) for determining
According to the determination by the game content determination means (for example, the game content determination means MN), the identification information display control means (for example, the first information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display unit) Second main game state temporary storage means MB10-C),
This is a period for maintaining the state where the identification information is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period from the time when the identification information is stopped and displayed, and within the predetermined period, the variable display start condition of the identification information is newly satisfied. There is an identification information display fixed period, which is a period that cannot be obtained,
Prior to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold after the occurrence of the hold, the game content scheduled when the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold is satisfied is determined in advance. And a pachinko that is configured to vary an identification information display fixed period provided before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold based on the result of the prior determination. It is a gaming machine.

The pachinko gaming machine according to this aspect (16)
A start opening (for example, a first main game start opening A10, a second main game start opening B10) into which a game ball can enter;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying identification information (for example, first main game symbol display unit A21g, second main game symbol display unit B21g);
An effect display unit (for example, an effect display device SG) capable of displaying the effect;
A main game unit (for example, main control board M) that controls the progress of the game,
A secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S) that controls display control of the production,
The main game part (for example, the main control board M)
Random number acquisition means (for example, random number acquisition determination execution means MJ20) for acquiring a random number based on the ball entering the start opening (for example, the first main game start opening A10, the second main game start opening B10);
When a random number is acquired by a random number acquisition unit (for example, a random number acquisition determination execution unit MJ20), a random number temporary storage unit (for example, a hold control unit) temporarily stores the acquired random number as a hold until the determination result permission condition is satisfied. MJ30)
When the conditions for determining whether or not to win / fail are satisfied, a means for determining whether or not to perform the determination based on the random number (for example, a lottery means MN10),
Identification information display content determination means (for example, symbol content determination means MN40) for determining stop identification information of identification information based on the result of the determination of success / failure;
Based on the determination by the identification information display content determination means (for example, the symbol content determination means MN40), the identification information is displayed in the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g). Identification information display control means (for example, display control means MP10) for controlling to stop display the stop identification information after variably displaying;
If the result of the determination of success / failure is winning, after the stop identification information is stopped and displayed on the identification information display unit (for example, the first main game symbol display unit A21g, the second main game symbol display unit B21g), the player Special game control means (for example, special game control means MP30) for executing a special game advantageous to the player,
A low-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is won with a predetermined probability, and a high-probability lottery state in which the result of the success / failure determination is a winning with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, after the execution of the special game In the case of a high probability lottery state, the unit from the start of change display of the identification information to the stop display is one unit, and after the execution of the special game, the unit is repeated. A lottery state control means (for example, specific game control means MP50) that can be controlled not to enter a low-probability lottery state until the number of times reaches a predetermined number;
The first variation period state in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is the first period, and the second fluctuation in which the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information is a second period different from the first period A special state in the high probability lottery state after the end of the execution of the special game. A variable period state control means (for example, determination of a limited frequency variation mode) that can be controlled to enter the second variation period state after reaching a specific number of times when the number of repetitions of one unit is less than the predetermined number. Means MN52),
A means for transmitting game information necessary for effect display executed on the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side to the sub-game unit (for example, sub-control board S) side, which satisfies the conditions for permission / inhibition determination. A game information transmission means (for example, information transmission control means MT) capable of transmitting in advance information relating to the suspension that has not been made to the secondary game unit (for example, the secondary control board S),
In the case of the first variation period state, when the number of holds at the time of satisfying the acceptance determination condition is the first number of reservations and the number of reservations at the time of satisfying the condition of acceptance determination is the first hold In the case of a second holding number that is larger than the number, the average value of the variable information display period of the identification information when the result of the success / failure determination when the acceptance / rejection determination permission condition is satisfied is not won While the average difference occurs,
In the case of the second variation period state, the acceptance determination condition is satisfied as an average value of the variation display period of the identification information when the result of the determination is non-winning when the acceptance determination permission condition is satisfied. The average value difference for the predetermined period according to the number of holds at the time point is not generated (or smaller than the average value difference in the case of the first variation period state),
The sub game part (for example, the sub control board S)
Game information receiving means (for example, display information receiving means SM10) for receiving game information transmitted from the main game section (for example, main control board M);
When information relating to the hold is received by the game information receiving means (for example, the display information receiving means SM10), if a predetermined condition is satisfied in the received information relating to the hold, the presence of the hold satisfying the predetermined condition Is provided with a hold pre-reading effect display control means (for example, a hold pre-reading effect execution control means SM26) that controls the display of the hold pre-reading effect display content for suggesting or notifying on the effect display unit (for example, the effect display device SG). ,
When it is scheduled to reach the specific number of times due to the execution of the unit related to the hold that has occurred in the first fluctuation period state, the hold pre-read effect display content is displayed as an effect display unit (for example, an effect display device) SG) is a pachinko gaming machine characterized in that it can be hidden.

M main control board, MJ game information control means MJ10 entry determination means,
MJ11-A 1st main game start entrance entrance judging means MJ11-B 2nd main game start entrance entrance judging means, MJ11-H Auxiliary game entrance entrance entrance judging means MJ11-C10 1st grand prize entrance entrance judgment Means, MJ11-C20 second prize winning entrance determination means MJ20 random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-A first main game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ21-B second main game random number acquisition determination execution means, MJ21-H Game random number acquisition determination execution means MJ30 Hold control means, MJ31 Hold digest control means MJ31j Fluctuation start condition satisfaction determination means, MJ32 Symbol hold means MJ32-A First main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-A First main game symbol hold information temporarily Storage means MJ32-B second main game symbol hold means, MJ32b-B second main game symbol hold information temporary storage means MJ32-H Auxiliary game symbol hold Means, MJ32b-H auxiliary game symbol hold information temporary storage means MN game content determination means, MN10 win / fail lottery means MN11-A first main game pass / fail lottery means, MN11ta-A first main game pass / fail lottery table MN11-B second Main game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-B Second main game success / failure lottery table MN11-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery means, MN11ta-H Auxiliary game success / failure lottery table MN20 Special game transition determination means, MN40 Symbol content determination means MN41-A First main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-A First main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-B Second main game symbol determination means, MN41ta-B Second main game symbol determination lottery table MN41-H Auxiliary game symbol determination Means, MN41ta-H Auxiliary game symbol determination lottery table MN50 Fluctuation mode determination MN51-A first main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-A first main game variation mode determination lottery table, MN51-B second main game variation mode determination means MN51ta-B second main game variation mode determination lottery Table, MN51-H auxiliary game variation mode determination means MN51ta-H auxiliary game variation mode determination lottery table, MN52 limited frequency variation mode determination means MN52ta limited frequency variation mode determination lottery table, MN52c limited frequency counter A
MN52c-2 limited frequency counter B, MN52b limited frequency related information temporary storage means MP game progress means, MP10 display control means MP11-C first and second main game symbol control means, MP11t-C first and second main game symbols Fluctuation management timer MP11-H Auxiliary game symbol control means, MP11t-H Auxiliary game symbol fluctuation management timer MP20-B Second main game start opening / closing control means, MP21-B Second main game start opening electric combination Object opening / closing condition determining means MP22t-B Second main game start opening electric accessory release timer, MP30 special game control means MP31 condition determining means, MP32 special game content determining means MP32ta special game content reference table, MP33 special game executing means MP33- C 1st and 2nd grand prize opening electric accessory opening / closing control means, MP33c winning ball counter MP34 Special Game time management means, MP34t special game timer MP40 small hit game control means, MP41t small hit game timer MP40b small hit game related information temporary storage means, MP50 specific game control means MP51 certain change end condition determination means, MP52 short time end condition determination Means MP52c Short-time counter, MB gaming state temporary storage means MB10-C first and second main gaming state temporary storage means, MB11b-C first and second main gaming symbol information temporary storage means MB10-H auxiliary gaming state temporary storage Means, MB11b-H auxiliary game symbol information temporary storage means MB20b special game related information temporary storage means, MB30b specific game related information temporary storage means MT information transmission control means MT10 command transmission buffer, MH prize ball payout determination means A first main Game peripheral equipment, A10 1st main game start A11s First main game start entrance detection device, A20 First main game symbol display device A21g First main game symbol display unit, A21h First main game symbol hold display unit B Second main game peripheral device, B10 Second main game Start port B11s Second main game start port entrance detection device, B11d Second main game start port electric accessory B20 Second main game symbol display device, B21g Second main game symbol display unit B21h Second main game symbol hold display unit , C 1st and 2nd main game shared peripheral device C10 1st grand prize opening, C11s 1st big prize opening prize detection device C11d 1st big prize opening electric accessory, C20 2nd big prize opening C21s 2nd big prize opening Winning detection device, C21d 2nd big winning opening electric accessory H auxiliary game peripheral device, H10 auxiliary game start port H11s auxiliary game start port entrance detection device, H20 auxiliary game symbol display device H21g auxiliary game symbol display unit, H2 1h Auxiliary game symbol hold display part S Sub control board, SM effect display control means (sub main control board)
SM10 display information receiving means, SM11b main side information temporary storage means SM20 effect display control means, SM21 decoration symbol display control means SM21n drawing display content determination means, SM21ta drawing variation content determination lottery table SM21b drawing related information temporary storage means , SM21t Drawing variation time management timer SM22 Drawing hold information display control means, SM22b Drawing hold information temporary storage means SM26 Hold prefetch effect execution control means, SM26k Hold prefetch effect execution feasibility determination means SM26b Prefetch related information temporary storage means, SM23 Background effect display control means SM23n Background effect display content determining means, SM23b Background effect related information temporary storage means SM23c Awakening stage stay counter, SM23c-2 Devil stage stay counter SM24 Notice effect display control means, SM24n Notification effect display content determination means SM24b Advance notice related information temporary storage means, SM25 Reach effect display control means SM25n Reach effect display content determination means, SM25b Reach effect related information temporary storage means SM40 Information transmission / reception control means SS Effect display means (sub-sub-control section) ), SS10 sub information transmission / reception control means SS20 image display control means, SS21b image display related information temporary storage means SG effect display device, SG10 display area SG11 decoration symbol display area, SG12 first reserved display section SG13 second reserved display section KH Award Ball payout control board KE Award ball payout device

Claims (1)

A starting opening where game balls can enter,
A variable winning opening that can be open and closed;
An identification information display unit capable of displaying the identification information;
Random number acquisition means for acquiring a random number based on the entrance to the starting port,
When a random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, the random number temporarily storing means for temporarily storing the acquired random number until the variation display start condition of the identification information is satisfied, and controlling the hold to occur,
When the variation display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, the determination of validity is performed based on the random number related to the certain retention, and the stop display mode of the identification information and the variation display mode of the identification information based on the determination result A game content determination means for determining
In accordance with the determination by the game content determination means, identification information display control means for controlling the identification information to be stopped and displayed after the identification information is variably displayed on the identification information display section;
A special game control means capable of executing a special game that can make the variable prize opening an advantageous state for the player after the determination result based on the random number is winning and the identification information is stopped and displayed;
Non-winning identification information stop display mode A, non-winning identification information stop display mode B, and non-winning identification information as types related to the stop display mode of identification information when the determination result based on the random number is non-winning At least a stop display mode C,
Identification when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, compared to the variation display period of the identification information when the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A The variable information display period is configured to be relatively long,
If the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A when the identification information variable display start condition for a certain hold is satisfied, the first identification information variable display start condition for the certain hold While the average value for the variable information display period of the identification information may differ depending on the number of holds remaining at the time of satisfying
When the variable information display start condition of the identification information related to a certain hold is satisfied, if the identification information stop display mode is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the certain hold Regardless of the number of suspensions remaining at the time when the identification information fluctuation display start condition is satisfied, the average value related to the identification information fluctuation display period is configured to be uniform,
Prior to satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the certain hold after the occurrence of the certain hold, the pre-reading information indicating the presence of the certain hold to the player is suggested to the player in advance or Can be informed,
After the occurrence of a certain hold and before satisfying the variable display start condition of the identification information related to the hold, the display of the identification information scheduled to be stopped when the change display start condition of the identification information related to the hold is satisfied A mode is preliminarily determined, and when the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the reservation pre-read information is suggested to the player in advance. Alternatively, on the other hand, if the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode A, the reservation prefetch information is not suggested or notified to the player in advance, or the advance Compared with the case where the determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B or the non-winning identification information stop display mode C, the frequency with which the reserved pre-read information is suggested or notified to the player in advance In the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode B and the case where the prior determination result is the non-winning identification information stop display mode C. The pachinko gaming machine is configured to differ in frequency of suggesting or informing the player of the hold prefetch information in advance.

Images